US20160109645A1 - Illumination Devices Including Multiple Light Emitting Elements - Google Patents
Illumination Devices Including Multiple Light Emitting Elements Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20160109645A1 US20160109645A1 US14/977,460 US201514977460A US2016109645A1 US 20160109645 A1 US20160109645 A1 US 20160109645A1 US 201514977460 A US201514977460 A US 201514977460A US 2016109645 A1 US2016109645 A1 US 2016109645A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- light
- luminaire
- light guide
- optical
- angular range
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B6/00—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
- G02B6/0001—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems
- G02B6/0011—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems the light guides being planar or of plate-like form
- G02B6/0075—Arrangements of multiple light guides
- G02B6/0078—Side-by-side arrangements, e.g. for large area displays
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F21—LIGHTING
- F21V—FUNCTIONAL FEATURES OR DETAILS OF LIGHTING DEVICES OR SYSTEMS THEREOF; STRUCTURAL COMBINATIONS OF LIGHTING DEVICES WITH OTHER ARTICLES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F21V7/00—Reflectors for light sources
- F21V7/0025—Combination of two or more reflectors for a single light source
- F21V7/0033—Combination of two or more reflectors for a single light source with successive reflections from one reflector to the next or following
- F21V7/0041—Combination of two or more reflectors for a single light source with successive reflections from one reflector to the next or following for avoiding direct view of the light source or to prevent dazzling
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F21—LIGHTING
- F21V—FUNCTIONAL FEATURES OR DETAILS OF LIGHTING DEVICES OR SYSTEMS THEREOF; STRUCTURAL COMBINATIONS OF LIGHTING DEVICES WITH OTHER ARTICLES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F21V23/00—Arrangement of electric circuit elements in or on lighting devices
- F21V23/003—Arrangement of electric circuit elements in or on lighting devices the elements being electronics drivers or controllers for operating the light source, e.g. for a LED array
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F21—LIGHTING
- F21V—FUNCTIONAL FEATURES OR DETAILS OF LIGHTING DEVICES OR SYSTEMS THEREOF; STRUCTURAL COMBINATIONS OF LIGHTING DEVICES WITH OTHER ARTICLES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F21V23/00—Arrangement of electric circuit elements in or on lighting devices
- F21V23/003—Arrangement of electric circuit elements in or on lighting devices the elements being electronics drivers or controllers for operating the light source, e.g. for a LED array
- F21V23/007—Arrangement of electric circuit elements in or on lighting devices the elements being electronics drivers or controllers for operating the light source, e.g. for a LED array enclosed in a casing
- F21V23/008—Arrangement of electric circuit elements in or on lighting devices the elements being electronics drivers or controllers for operating the light source, e.g. for a LED array enclosed in a casing the casing being outside the housing of the lighting device
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F21—LIGHTING
- F21V—FUNCTIONAL FEATURES OR DETAILS OF LIGHTING DEVICES OR SYSTEMS THEREOF; STRUCTURAL COMBINATIONS OF LIGHTING DEVICES WITH OTHER ARTICLES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F21V23/00—Arrangement of electric circuit elements in or on lighting devices
- F21V23/003—Arrangement of electric circuit elements in or on lighting devices the elements being electronics drivers or controllers for operating the light source, e.g. for a LED array
- F21V23/007—Arrangement of electric circuit elements in or on lighting devices the elements being electronics drivers or controllers for operating the light source, e.g. for a LED array enclosed in a casing
- F21V23/009—Arrangement of electric circuit elements in or on lighting devices the elements being electronics drivers or controllers for operating the light source, e.g. for a LED array enclosed in a casing the casing being inside the housing of the lighting device
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F21—LIGHTING
- F21V—FUNCTIONAL FEATURES OR DETAILS OF LIGHTING DEVICES OR SYSTEMS THEREOF; STRUCTURAL COMBINATIONS OF LIGHTING DEVICES WITH OTHER ARTICLES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F21V7/00—Reflectors for light sources
- F21V7/0008—Reflectors for light sources providing for indirect lighting
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F21—LIGHTING
- F21V—FUNCTIONAL FEATURES OR DETAILS OF LIGHTING DEVICES OR SYSTEMS THEREOF; STRUCTURAL COMBINATIONS OF LIGHTING DEVICES WITH OTHER ARTICLES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F21V7/00—Reflectors for light sources
- F21V7/0025—Combination of two or more reflectors for a single light source
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B1/00—Optical elements characterised by the material of which they are made; Optical coatings for optical elements
- G02B1/04—Optical elements characterised by the material of which they are made; Optical coatings for optical elements made of organic materials, e.g. plastics
- G02B1/045—Light guides
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B6/00—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
- G02B6/0001—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems
- G02B6/0011—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems the light guides being planar or of plate-like form
- G02B6/0013—Means for improving the coupling-in of light from the light source into the light guide
- G02B6/0023—Means for improving the coupling-in of light from the light source into the light guide provided by one optical element, or plurality thereof, placed between the light guide and the light source, or around the light source
- G02B6/0025—Diffusing sheet or layer; Prismatic sheet or layer
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B6/00—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
- G02B6/0001—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems
- G02B6/0011—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems the light guides being planar or of plate-like form
- G02B6/0033—Means for improving the coupling-out of light from the light guide
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B6/00—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
- G02B6/0001—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems
- G02B6/0011—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems the light guides being planar or of plate-like form
- G02B6/0033—Means for improving the coupling-out of light from the light guide
- G02B6/0035—Means for improving the coupling-out of light from the light guide provided on the surface of the light guide or in the bulk of it
- G02B6/0036—2-D arrangement of prisms, protrusions, indentations or roughened surfaces
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B6/00—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
- G02B6/0001—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems
- G02B6/0011—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems the light guides being planar or of plate-like form
- G02B6/0033—Means for improving the coupling-out of light from the light guide
- G02B6/0035—Means for improving the coupling-out of light from the light guide provided on the surface of the light guide or in the bulk of it
- G02B6/0045—Means for improving the coupling-out of light from the light guide provided on the surface of the light guide or in the bulk of it by shaping at least a portion of the light guide
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B6/00—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
- G02B6/0001—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems
- G02B6/0011—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems the light guides being planar or of plate-like form
- G02B6/0033—Means for improving the coupling-out of light from the light guide
- G02B6/0035—Means for improving the coupling-out of light from the light guide provided on the surface of the light guide or in the bulk of it
- G02B6/0045—Means for improving the coupling-out of light from the light guide provided on the surface of the light guide or in the bulk of it by shaping at least a portion of the light guide
- G02B6/0046—Tapered light guide, e.g. wedge-shaped light guide
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B6/00—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
- G02B6/0001—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems
- G02B6/0011—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems the light guides being planar or of plate-like form
- G02B6/0033—Means for improving the coupling-out of light from the light guide
- G02B6/005—Means for improving the coupling-out of light from the light guide provided by one optical element, or plurality thereof, placed on the light output side of the light guide
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B6/00—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
- G02B6/0001—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems
- G02B6/0011—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems the light guides being planar or of plate-like form
- G02B6/0033—Means for improving the coupling-out of light from the light guide
- G02B6/005—Means for improving the coupling-out of light from the light guide provided by one optical element, or plurality thereof, placed on the light output side of the light guide
- G02B6/0055—Reflecting element, sheet or layer
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B6/00—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
- G02B6/0001—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems
- G02B6/0011—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems the light guides being planar or of plate-like form
- G02B6/0066—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems the light guides being planar or of plate-like form characterised by the light source being coupled to the light guide
- G02B6/0068—Arrangements of plural sources, e.g. multi-colour light sources
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B6/00—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
- G02B6/0001—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems
- G02B6/0011—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems the light guides being planar or of plate-like form
- G02B6/0066—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems the light guides being planar or of plate-like form characterised by the light source being coupled to the light guide
- G02B6/0073—Light emitting diode [LED]
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F21—LIGHTING
- F21S—NON-PORTABLE LIGHTING DEVICES; SYSTEMS THEREOF; VEHICLE LIGHTING DEVICES SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR VEHICLE EXTERIORS
- F21S8/00—Lighting devices intended for fixed installation
- F21S8/02—Lighting devices intended for fixed installation of recess-mounted type, e.g. downlighters
- F21S8/026—Lighting devices intended for fixed installation of recess-mounted type, e.g. downlighters intended to be recessed in a ceiling or like overhead structure, e.g. suspended ceiling
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F21—LIGHTING
- F21S—NON-PORTABLE LIGHTING DEVICES; SYSTEMS THEREOF; VEHICLE LIGHTING DEVICES SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR VEHICLE EXTERIORS
- F21S8/00—Lighting devices intended for fixed installation
- F21S8/04—Lighting devices intended for fixed installation intended only for mounting on a ceiling or the like overhead structures
- F21S8/06—Lighting devices intended for fixed installation intended only for mounting on a ceiling or the like overhead structures by suspension
- F21S8/061—Lighting devices intended for fixed installation intended only for mounting on a ceiling or the like overhead structures by suspension with a non-rigid pendant, i.e. a cable, wire or chain
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F21—LIGHTING
- F21V—FUNCTIONAL FEATURES OR DETAILS OF LIGHTING DEVICES OR SYSTEMS THEREOF; STRUCTURAL COMBINATIONS OF LIGHTING DEVICES WITH OTHER ARTICLES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F21V2200/00—Use of light guides, e.g. fibre optic devices, in lighting devices or systems
- F21V2200/10—Use of light guides, e.g. fibre optic devices, in lighting devices or systems of light guides of the optical fibres type
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F21—LIGHTING
- F21V—FUNCTIONAL FEATURES OR DETAILS OF LIGHTING DEVICES OR SYSTEMS THEREOF; STRUCTURAL COMBINATIONS OF LIGHTING DEVICES WITH OTHER ARTICLES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F21V2200/00—Use of light guides, e.g. fibre optic devices, in lighting devices or systems
- F21V2200/20—Use of light guides, e.g. fibre optic devices, in lighting devices or systems of light guides of a generally planar shape
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F21—LIGHTING
- F21V—FUNCTIONAL FEATURES OR DETAILS OF LIGHTING DEVICES OR SYSTEMS THEREOF; STRUCTURAL COMBINATIONS OF LIGHTING DEVICES WITH OTHER ARTICLES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F21V29/00—Protecting lighting devices from thermal damage; Cooling or heating arrangements specially adapted for lighting devices or systems
- F21V29/50—Cooling arrangements
- F21V29/70—Cooling arrangements characterised by passive heat-dissipating elements, e.g. heat-sinks
- F21V29/74—Cooling arrangements characterised by passive heat-dissipating elements, e.g. heat-sinks with fins or blades
- F21V29/76—Cooling arrangements characterised by passive heat-dissipating elements, e.g. heat-sinks with fins or blades with essentially identical parallel planar fins or blades, e.g. with comb-like cross-section
- F21V29/763—Cooling arrangements characterised by passive heat-dissipating elements, e.g. heat-sinks with fins or blades with essentially identical parallel planar fins or blades, e.g. with comb-like cross-section the planes containing the fins or blades having the direction of the light emitting axis
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F21—LIGHTING
- F21V—FUNCTIONAL FEATURES OR DETAILS OF LIGHTING DEVICES OR SYSTEMS THEREOF; STRUCTURAL COMBINATIONS OF LIGHTING DEVICES WITH OTHER ARTICLES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F21V29/00—Protecting lighting devices from thermal damage; Cooling or heating arrangements specially adapted for lighting devices or systems
- F21V29/50—Cooling arrangements
- F21V29/70—Cooling arrangements characterised by passive heat-dissipating elements, e.g. heat-sinks
- F21V29/74—Cooling arrangements characterised by passive heat-dissipating elements, e.g. heat-sinks with fins or blades
- F21V29/77—Cooling arrangements characterised by passive heat-dissipating elements, e.g. heat-sinks with fins or blades with essentially identical diverging planar fins or blades, e.g. with fan-like or star-like cross-section
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F21—LIGHTING
- F21V—FUNCTIONAL FEATURES OR DETAILS OF LIGHTING DEVICES OR SYSTEMS THEREOF; STRUCTURAL COMBINATIONS OF LIGHTING DEVICES WITH OTHER ARTICLES, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- F21V29/00—Protecting lighting devices from thermal damage; Cooling or heating arrangements specially adapted for lighting devices or systems
- F21V29/50—Cooling arrangements
- F21V29/70—Cooling arrangements characterised by passive heat-dissipating elements, e.g. heat-sinks
- F21V29/83—Cooling arrangements characterised by passive heat-dissipating elements, e.g. heat-sinks the elements having apertures, ducts or channels, e.g. heat radiation holes
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F21—LIGHTING
- F21Y—INDEXING SCHEME ASSOCIATED WITH SUBCLASSES F21K, F21L, F21S and F21V, RELATING TO THE FORM OR THE KIND OF THE LIGHT SOURCES OR OF THE COLOUR OF THE LIGHT EMITTED
- F21Y2103/00—Elongate light sources, e.g. fluorescent tubes
- F21Y2103/10—Elongate light sources, e.g. fluorescent tubes comprising a linear array of point-like light-generating elements
-
- F—MECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
- F21—LIGHTING
- F21Y—INDEXING SCHEME ASSOCIATED WITH SUBCLASSES F21K, F21L, F21S and F21V, RELATING TO THE FORM OR THE KIND OF THE LIGHT SOURCES OR OF THE COLOUR OF THE LIGHT EMITTED
- F21Y2115/00—Light-generating elements of semiconductor light sources
- F21Y2115/10—Light-emitting diodes [LED]
Definitions
- the tertiary optics of the illumination devices comprise a common reflector.
- the redirecting surface comprises a reflective material, where the reflective material includes one or more of Ag or A 1 .
- the secondary optic has a uniform cross-sectional shape along the longitudinal dimension of the first surface of the substrate.
- at least one of the first and second portions of the redirecting surface has a uniform cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension of the first surface of the substrate.
- a relative offset of one or more of the LEEs, one or more of the primary optics, the light guide, and the secondary optic with respect to one or more of one or more of the LEEs, one or more of the primary optics, the light guide and the secondary optic determines an asymmetry of the fourth angular range, wherein the relative offset is selected such that the asymmetry of the fourth angular range matches a predefined asymmetry.
- an illumination device includes a substrate having first and second opposing surfaces, such that each of the first and second surfaces are elongated and have a longitudinal dimension and a transverse dimension shorter than the longitudinal dimension; a plurality of light-emitting elements (LEE) arranged on the first surface of the substrate and distributed along the longitudinal dimension, such that the LEEs emit, during operation, light in a first angular range with respect to a normal to the first surface of the substrate; one or more primary optics arranged in an elongated configuration along the longitudinal dimension of the first surface and coupled with the LEEs, the one or more primary optics being shaped to redirect light received from the LEEs in the first angular range, and to provide the redirected light in a second angular range, a divergence of the second angular range being smaller than a divergence of the first angular range at least in a plane perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension of the first surface of the substrate; and a secondary optic comprising a secondary reflector elong
- the one or more primary optics comprises one integrally formed primary optic.
- the optical element and optical extractor can be shaped so that, in a first plane, the luminaire directs substantially all of the light into a range of solid angles from ⁇ 45 degrees to 45 degrees, where 0 degrees corresponds to a normal of a planar surface of the light guide. In some implementations, the optical element and optical extractor can be shaped so that the luminaire asymmetrically distributes the light about 0 degrees in the first plane. In some implementations, the optical element and optical extractor can be shaped so that, in a second plane orthogonal to the first plane, the luminaire directs substantially all of the light into a range of solid angles from ⁇ 45 degrees to 45 degrees, where 0 degrees corresponds to the normal of the planar surface of the light guide.
- the at least one collector includes a plurality of collectors, each arranged to receive light emitted by a corresponding one of the plurality of LEDs.
- the at least one collector includes at least one optical interface shaped to collimate the light in at least one dimension.
- the at least one optical interface of the optical element can be shaped to collimate the light in two dimensions.
- the at least one optical interface of the optical element can have a parabolic shape.
- the at least one collector can include an element formed from a solid dielectric material, the element being arranged to transmit light from the LEDs towards the first reflective surface.
- an article in another aspect, includes a cabinet; and a luminaire as described for the foregoing implementation mounted to a surface of the cabinet.
- an article in another aspect, includes a piece of furniture having a work surface; the luminaire described herein; and a mounting fixture arranged to position the luminaire to illuminate the work surface.
- the secondary reflector can include transparent portions along a longitudinal extension of the secondary reflector, where a portion of the light output by the output surface of the solid secondary optic can pass through the transparent portions.
- the transparent portions can be openings.
- the secondary reflector can include one or more light conversion materials to convert at least a portion of the light output by the output surface of the solid secondary optic. Converting the light output by the output surface of the solid secondary optic can include at least one of converting (i) a chromaticity, (ii) a spectral range, or (iii) an intensity of the light output by the output surface of the solid secondary optic.
- the elongated secondary reflector can be spaced apart from the output surface.
- colllimation and “collimate” are used herein to refer to the degree of alignment of rays of light or the act of increasing such alignment including the reduction of divergence of the propagation directions of a plurality of light rays, also referred to as a beam of light, or simply light.
- FIG. 6 is a view of another embodiment of a luminaire.
- FIG. 7 is a view of yet another embodiment of a luminaire.
- FIGS. 11A and 11B are views of an embodiment of a pendant luminaire.
- FIG. 11C is a polar plot of a simulated intensity profile of an embodiment of a pendant luminaire.
- FIG. 11F shows an example of a secondary reflector with electrochromic material.
- FIGS. 20A-20C show other aspects of the intensity distribution associated with a task luminaire.
- T is in a range from about 0.05 cm to about 2 cm (e.g., about 0.1 cm or more, about 0.2 cm or more, about 0.5 cm or more, about 0.8 cm or more, about 1 cm or more, about 1.5 cm or more).
- a narrow light guide also provides a narrow exit aperture. As such light emitted from the light guide can be considered to resemble the light emitted from a one-dimensional linear light source, also referred to as an elongate virtual filament.
- optical extractor 240 adjacent to the lower edge 232 of light guide 230 is optically coupled to edge 232 .
- optical extractor 240 can be affixed to light guide 230 using an index matching fluid, grease, or adhesive.
- optical extractor 240 is fused to light guide 230 or they are integrally formed from a single piece of material.
- FIGS. 2B and 2D show that for a cross-sectional plane perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension (or also referred to as longitudinal extension) of the luminaire module 200 , the redirecting surface 243 can have an apex 241 that separates the first and second portions of the redirecting surface 242 , 244 .
- the apex 241 of the redirecting surface can be a rounded vertex with a non-zero radius of curvature.
- the first and second portions of the redirecting surface 242 , 244 can have first and second arcuate shapes in the cross-sectional plane perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension of the luminaire module 200 .
- first and second curves corresponding to the first and second portions of the redirecting surface [ 242 , 244 ] include one or more discontinuities associated with the slots 2455 ′, 2455 ′′.
- a luminaire module can include multiple substrates and/or multiple optical couplers.
- FIG. 2L shows a side view of a luminaire that includes multiple substrates 110 , 110 ′ and multiple optical couplers, 120 , 120 ′.
- the LEEs 112 , 112 ′ emit light during operation in first angular ranges (corresponding to the first angular range 115 in FIG. 1 ) with respect to a normal to the substrates 110 , 110 ′.
- the optical couplers 120 , 120 ′ receive light in the first angular ranges from LEEs 112 , 112 ′.
- Secondary reflectors 610 are shaped to redirect the light from the optical extractor towards to the target surface, as illustrated by rays 612 and 614 .
- the surfaces of reflectors 610 can be specular reflecting surfaces or diffusely reflecting surfaces.
- the shape of the surfaces in this instance, concave provides an additional degree of freedom for a designer to tailor the light distribution profile from luminaire module 200 .
- the one or more primary optics 220 may include indexing and reference features that can be used to accurately and repeatedly position the primary optics 220 to the LEEs 212 .
- the one or more solid primary optics 220 are shaped to redirect light received from the LEEs 212 in the first angular range, and to provide the redirected light in a second angular range.
- a divergence of the second angular range is smaller than a divergence of the first angular range at least in a plane x-z perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension of the luminaire 1250 . Examples of such solid primary optics 220 (couplers) are described in detail below in connection with FIGS. 34-36 .
- a first portion of the intensity distribution output by the luminaire 1250 during operation includes at least some of the first reflected light having the seventh angular range 152 . Additionally, a second portion of the intensity distribution output by the luminaire 1250 during operation includes at least some of the light output by the second output surface 248 of the solid secondary optic within the sixth angular range 142 ′.
- the luminaire 1250 is an example of an asymmetric luminaire including (i) an optical extractor 240 with a symmetric profile in a cross-sectional plane x-z, and (ii) a single reflector of the tertiary optic, other asymmetric form factors are possible.
- the optical extractor can have an asymmetric profile in cross-section, resulting in an asymmetric intensity profile in cross-section.
- FIG. 13A shows an exemplary embodiment of such an asymmetric luminaire 1300 .
- the asymmetric luminaire 1300 is elongated along the y-axis and includes optical coupler 220 , light guide 230 , and an asymmetric optical extractor 1310 .
- the reflector 610 of the tertiary optic can shape the light output by the optical extractor 1310 in the first angular range 1317 , and redirect the shaped light in an angular range 1240 to provide direct illumination of the work surface.
- FIG. 13F shows a polar plot of the illumination distribution 1390 associated with the luminaire 1350 , including an intensity lobe 1315 corresponding to the indirect component of the illumination distribution 1390 , and an intensity pattern 1240 corresponding to the direct component of the same.
- FIG. 13G shows a perspective view of an example luminaire 1360 ′ with three optical couplers 220 - 1 , 220 - 2 , 220 - 3 in which a planar tertiary optic 610 - 1 extends along a portion of the length of the light guide 230 for the width (parallel to y) of the optical coupler 220 - 1 .
- the example luminaire 1360 ′ may optionally be configured to allow variable placement of the tertiary optic 610 - 1 .
- each pair of adjacent luminaire modules is connected by one of connector elements 1420 , 1421 , 1422 , and 1423 .
- each connector element has a cross-sectional profile that matches (other embodiments may be different) the luminaire modules, and bends through 90° in the x-y plane, forming the corners of the square.
- connector elements 1420 , 1421 , 1422 , and 1423 can be formed from a variety of materials, such as a plastic or a metal.
- the connector elements can be transparent or opaque.
- the connector elements can also be attached to the luminaire modules in a variety of ways.
- 0° corresponds to the z-direction.
- the luminaire provides direct illumination of similar flux corresponding to the lobes between ⁇ 45° and 45°.
- the luminaire provides indirect illumination of similar flux.
- the indirect illumination corresponds to lobes between 90° and 112.5° and between ⁇ 90° and ⁇ 112.5°.
- Luminaire 1400 emits negligible amounts of light into polar angles between 45° and 90°, between ⁇ 45° and ⁇ 90°, and between 112.5° and ⁇ 112.5°.
- the illuminance varies between about 300 lux and about 450 lux across this section.
- the illumination drops below 375 lux within about 1,000 mm from the edges of the target surface in this section, but stays within a range from about 375 lux to about 475 lux across the majority of the section.
- luminaire modules that direct light to both sides of the light guide, either in a symmetric or asymmetric manner.
- luminaire modules can be configured to direct light to only one side of the light guide.
- a luminaire 1700 is designed to direct light in the positive x-direction, but not in the negative x-direction.
- Luminaire 1700 includes a carrier 1710 that houses six LEEs 1714 mounted on a strip 1712 , and a corresponding optical coupler 1720 mounted adjacent each LEE.
- Each optical coupler 120 is configured to redirect the light received in the first angular range 115 into a light with a second angular range 125 .
- the light with the second angular range 125 can be directed into the optional light guide 1730 . If the optional light guide 1730 is not part of the luminaire 1700 , the optical couplers 120 redirect the light with the second angular range 125 into the optical extractor 1740 .
- the light guide 1730 can guide the light to a distal end of the light guide 1730 away from LEEs 112 .
- the light guide 1730 provides the guided light at the distal end in an angular range 1735 .
- the light guide 1730 can be shaped to guide the light received from the optical couplers 120 in the second angular range 125 and to provide the guided light in substantially the same second angular range ( 1735 125 ) at the output end of the light guide.
- FIGS. 19A-19C show plots of the simulated intensity distribution from an installation composed of two luminaire modules on a 1200 mm ⁇ 600 mm work surface.
- the X-axis shows the long dimension of the work surface and the Y-axis shows the short dimension.
- FIG. 19A shows a contour plot of the illuminance across the work surface
- FIG. 19C shows a plot of illuminance (in lux) vs. X position (in mm).
- Illuminance varies between about 300 lux and 600 lux in the Y-direction and between about 400 lux and about 500 lux for the central 1,000 mm of the work surface in the X-direction, falling off nearer to the edges.
- Luminaire 2100 also includes a strip 2110 supporting six LEEs 2112 and electrical connector 2111 . Each collector is positioned adjacent a corresponding LEE and collimates light emitted from the LEE directing the light towards mirror 2130 . The collectors are designed to collimate light in two orthogonal planes. Mirror 2130 has a concave surface shaped to redirect the light from the collectors to illuminate a work surface.
- FIGS. 27D-27F show plots of the simulated intensity distribution from the same installation as depicted in FIGS. 27A-27C on a 2,000 mm ⁇ 400 mm back surface.
- the X-axis shows the long dimension of the back surface and the Y-axis shows the short dimension.
- FIG. 27D shows a contour plot of the illuminance across the work surface
- FIG. 27F shows a plot of illuminance (in lux) vs. X position (in mm).
- At least prevalent directions of the third and fourth angular ranges 142 , 142 ′ are different from each other and from a prevalent direction of propagation of light of the second angular range 125 at least perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension of the first surface of the substrate 2110 .
- a tertiary optic includes a reflector 2840 elongated along the longitudinal dimension.
- the reflector 2840 is spaced apart from and facing the first portion of the redirecting surface of the secondary optic 2830 .
- the reflector 2840 is shaped to reflect at least some of the light provided by the first portion of the redirecting surface of the secondary optic 2833 in the third angular range 142 with respect to the normal of the first surface of the substrate 2110 as first reflected light in a fifth angular range 152 with respect to the normal to the first surface of the substrate 2110 .
- the fifth angular range 152 is different than the third angular range 142 .
- a first portion of an intensity distribution output by the luminaire 2800 during operation includes at least some of the first reflected light from the fifth angular range 152 .
- a second portion of the intensity distribution output by the luminaire 2800 during operation includes at least some of the light provided by the second portion of the redirecting surface of the secondary optic 2832 ′ within the fourth angular range 142 ′.
- Illuminance varies between about 50 lux and 250 lux in the vertical direction from the target surface up to the about midway through the section, where it falls off, and between about 25 lux and about 125 lux for the central 17,000 mm of the section in the horizontal direction, falling off nearer to the edges.
- the gap can be filled with air or other low refractive-index medium to control back reflection of light from the phosphor layer.
- the phosphor layer 3438 may be formed by depositing a preformed layer or by curing one or more predisposed precursor substances from which the phosphor layer 3438 is then cured. As such phosphor may be uniformly or non-uniformly deposited along the length of the LEE strip 3432 . Furthermore, the phosphor layer 3438 and the previously noted encapsulant may be integrally formed.
- the phosphor may include Ce:YAG, TAG, nitride-based phosphors or other substances as noted herein to achieve predetermined CCTs from 2800 K- 5000 K, for example.
- the optical couplers 3422 are configured to narrow a broad, for example, Lambertian light emission from the phosphor layer 3438 .
- FIG. 34B illustrates an optical coupler with an asymmetrical configuration that can redirect more light into one portion of space than in another with respect to corresponding optical axes and thereby provide light from the optical coupler having an asymmetrical intensity pattern.
- an asymmetrical intensity pattern from an optical coupler may be partially or fully preserved, and may aid in providing a luminaire with predetermined photometric properties that may suit predetermined illumination applications.
- Asymmetric optical couplers may provide for tailoring of photometric output profiles for certain applications. It is noted that such asymmetry may be achieved via suitable asymmetric configuration of other components of the luminaire including the light pipe and/or the optical extractor, for example.
- the amount of light that is backscattered to the interface with the LEEs 3437 from the phosphor layer 3438 can depend on aspects of the phosphor layer 3438 and where the backscattered light impinges on the light input surface of the phosphor layer 3438 . If the backscattered light impinges on the LEEs 3437 the amount of light that leaves the phosphor layer 3438 depends on the discontinuity of the refractive indices at the interface between the LEEs 3437 and the phosphor layer 3438 , Backscattered light that impinges on the reflector layer 3452 is subject to absorption losses of the reflector layer 3452 .
- the lateral light variation can be reduced.
- the reduction in lateral light variation can be achieved, for example, because the surface of the phosphor layer is larger than the LEE surface, and no collimation is present in the lateral direction.
- a remaining lateral variation of properties of light at the output surface of the phosphor layer 3438 can depend on the lateral spacing between the LEEs 3437 and the effective thickness of the phosphor layer 3438 .
- FIG. 34F shows an example asymmetric intensity profile 3440 at the exit of an optical coupler. An asymmetric beam distribution may be partially conserved by downstream (along the optical path) components of the optical system.
- adjacent optical couplers in a string of optical couplers 3422 may be optically coupled with, or decoupled from one another to maintain transmission of light at the abutting interfaces between them below, at or above a predetermined level.
- Such configuration may depend on whether the optical couplers have a cavity or solid bulk configuration and whether they rely on total internal reflection and/or mirrored surfaces.
- an optical coupler as illustrated in FIG. 36A may also be used individually in a rotationally symmetrical luminaire, for example, examples of which are discussed below.
- the optical couplers in an LEE string may be optically isolated or coupled to provide predetermined collimation of light within one or more planes parallel to the optical axes of the optical couplers.
- adjacent optical couplers are optically coupled via suitable configuration of abutting interfaces, disposition of suitable material between adjacent optical couplers, integral formation or otherwise optically coupled.
- Optical decoupling may be achieved via disposition with formation of suitably sized gaps between individual optical couplers, or disposition of suitable reflective material such as films, layers, coatings or interjecting substances between or on abutting interfaces of adjacent optical couplers.
- Optical couplers may be integrally formed into lines or other groups (not illustrated) of adjacent optical couplers.
- a luminaire may include equal or different numbers of optical couplers within different groups of optical couplers.
- FIG. 36F shows a hollow embodiment of a primary optic 3630 (corresponding e.g. to primary optics 1520 2120 , 2920 ) configured to collect the light emitted by the LEEs 3438 and provide collimation and beam shaping to illuminate a secondary reflector.
- the primary optic 3630 has optical power perpendicular to the direction of a linear LED array 3438 only and provides beam shaping only in this direction.
- the light guide 3662 can provide at least a portion of the guided light at the distal end in an angular range 3664 .
- the light guide 3662 can be shaped to guide the light received from the optical couplers 120 in the angular range 125 .
- a sum of the areas of the discontinuous surfaces A 1 - 1 , A 1 - 2 , A 1 - 3 , and A 1 - 4 is smaller than the area of surface A 2 at the opposite side of the light guide.
- the surfaces A 1 - 1 , A 1 - 2 , A 1 - 3 , and A 1 - 4 can be the light input surface and the surface A 2 can be the light output surface, in some embodiments, the surface A 2 can be the light input surface and surfaces A 1 - 1 , A 1 - 2 , A 1 - 3 , and A 1 - 4 can be the light output surfaces of the light guide.
- the shape of the light guide can allow for variation of the light properties (e.g., angular ranges) along a longitudinal dimension of the light guide.
- FIGS. 37-40 each illustrate example luminaires that display this symmetry.
- Each example luminaire includes an optical coupler 3477 , a light guide 3478 and an optical extractor 3480 , which are integrally formed into a solid body that can reflect light via TIR. The integral formation is achieved by injection molding.
- Each example luminaire also includes a LEE module 3476 and a secondary reflector.
- the light guide 3478 may also be referred to as a light pipe.
- the optical coupler 3477 is configured to redirect light received from the one or more LEEs in the first angular range, and provide the redirected light in a second angular range at an output end of the optical coupler 3477 , such that a divergence of the second angular range is smaller than a divergence of the first angular range.
- the optical coupler 3477 can be configured to collimate light to narrower than +/ ⁇ 40 degrees to satisfy TIR requirements along a longitudinal extension (along the z-axis) of the cylindrical light guide 3478 , as shown in FIG. 38A , or of the prismatic light guide 3478 ′ with N facets, as shown in FIG. 38B .
- the optical extractor 3480 is optically coupled with the output end of the light guide 3478 or 3478 ′ at an input end of the optical extractor 3480 to receive light from the light guide 3478 or 3478 ′.
- the optical extractor 3480 has a redirecting surface spaced from the input end of the optical extractor 3480 and an output surface.
- the redirecting surface has an apex facing the input end of the optical extractor 3480 and is shaped to reflect light received at the input end of the optical extractor 3480 in the second angular range and provide the reflected light in a third angular range towards the output surface.
- the optical extractor 4126 reflects the light downward and outward by a specular reflective coating as indicated by arrows.
- the luminaire 4100 may optionally include a secondary reflector (not illustrated) disposed and suitably configured to at least partially surround the optical extractor 4126 .
- a secondary reflector may be disposed to surround the optical extractor 4126 from above so that light that is emitted upward from the optical extractor 4126 can be redirected downward towards a target surface.
- the base 4130 can include a switch, dimmer, heat sink or other components.
- the base 4130 may be configured to provide predetermined thermal coupling to the environment and may be used as a heat sink, for example.
- the optical couplers 4322 may include one or more optical elements including non-imaging dielectric TIR concentrators, such as CPC (compound parabolic concentrators), CECs (compound elliptical concentrators), CHC (compound hyperbolic concentrators), tapered, or untapered, light pipes, segmented concentrators, other geometry concentrators, one or more lenses or other optical elements, for example.
- the optical couplers 4322 may be nominally equal or have different configurations.
- optical couplers may have different profiles in the direction of the luminaire and/or perpendicular to the luminaire.
- the optical couplers 4322 may be rotationally symmetric, or have elliptical triangular, square, hexagonal, or multi-segment cross-sections perpendicular to the beam direction.
- the optical couplers 4322 may be integrally formed or configured from solid transparent material and solely rely on TIR or may be partially or fully reflectively coated on one or more surfaces.
- Optical couplers also may be hollow, or reflectively coated and/or non-imaging. Hollow reflectors can have the benefit of a shortened length over a dielectric collimating optic for the same collimation angle.
- the electrodes of bare LEE chips, or the electrodes of submounts on which the bare LEE chips are mounted, are operatively disposed to the PCB pads 4314 .
- Operative disposition may be performed by ultrasonic bonding, gluing, gluing with conductive adhesive, soldering, wire bonding, ball bumping and/or other operative interconnection.
- the LEEs may be flip chips, vertical chips (using a wire bond for the top LEE electrode), horizontal non-flip with wirebonding to anode and cathode, or other type of chip.
- Optical couplers may be configured to provide one or more receiving apertures, which may be configured to provide tapered inner walls, protrusions, ribs or other elements that provide a predetermined restorative force to the LEEs during the mating procedure so that LEEs and optical couplers can be aligned with predetermined accuracy.
- LEEs may be placed within recesses provided by optical couplers by automated equipment and centered by tapered walls or ribs to centered positions with a surrounding layer of gel to index match and optionally be cured to set their positions.
- An optional processing step may then planarize the assembly and remove excess material in preparation for testing and subsequent electrical and mechanical bonding to a substrate.
- FIG. 44A shows how an optical extractor 3870 may be modularly configured separately from a light guide 3872 .
- the light guide 3872 includes an input end 231 (in this example the top edge of the rectangular light guide 3872 ) and an output end 232 (in this example the bottom edge of the rectangular light guide 3872 ).
- the optical extractor 3870 includes an input end 232 ′.
- the input end 232 ′ of the optical extractor 3870 may be affixed to the output end (bottom edge) 232 of the rectangular light guide 3872 employing a suitably optically transparent coupling material having a matched index of refraction such as silicone.
- the optical extractor 3870 may be held in place by the coupling material, mechanical interference, a friction fit or otherwise, for example. This configuration may be employed to permit choosing from a selection of differently configured optical extractors that provide different intensity distributions better suited for a particular lighting application.
- the optical extractor 3870 may also be provided with a variety of distribution optics so that they can be joined to a common light guide 3872 in a completely modular fashion to suit the mounting height and lighting requirements of the space.
- FIG. 44B shows an example of a modular luminaire module 4420 .
- the luminaire module 4420 includes substrates 4422 - 1 , 4422 - 2 , and 4422 - 3 , on which LEEs are disposed, optical couplers 4424 - 1 , 4424 - 2 , and 4424 - 3 , light guides 4426 - 1 and 4426 - 2 , and optical extractors 4428 - 1 and 4428 - 2 .
- the optical couplers 4424 - 1 , 4424 - 2 , and 4424 - 3 can be coupled with the substrates 4422 - 1 , 4422 - 2 , and 4422 - 3 respectively.
- Optical components of luminaire may be configured to sustain exposure to predetermined amounts of short wavelength light, for example blue, violet or ultraviolet light. Depending on the embodiment, such light may propagate through substantial portions of a luminaire. Exposure of respective components may depend on the particular locations of phosphors. Respective components may be formed of suitably resistant materials. Likewise, components that assume high temperatures during operation of the luminaire be configured to provide predetermined heat resistance and resilience against mechanical stresses caused by thermal gradients and/or differential thermal expansion between different components. Wavelength-conversion materials and LEEs can assume high operating temperatures.
- luminaires are configured for suspension from and/or recess in a ceiling, wall or other surface of an object, room, or other space.
- the light guide may be disposed substantially vertically, horizontally or other direction with light inside the light guide substantially propagating downwards, sideways or other respective direction.
- Corresponding luminaires may be rotationally symmetrical about an optical axis or elongate.
- Elongate luminaire may be configured in predetermined lengths of about two, four or six feet long, for example.
- Corresponding luminaire may be configured as replacements to fluorescent tubes, recessed or suspended troffers, or provided in other configurations, for example.
- LEE chips which may be packaged, chip-on-board, or otherwise configured high-illuminance LEE chips need to be operatively disposed substantially equidistantly along a four foot LEE strip.
- the average distance between the LEE chips also referred to as pitch, amounts to about 24 mm.
- a luminaire configured to replace a typical fluorescent 2 foot by 2 foot troffer needs to generate about 3000 lumens, with a commensurate type or number of LEE chips.
- a corresponding example luminaire may be configured with 60 LEEs, each providing 50 lm, spaced at 10 mm per row.
Landscapes
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Optics & Photonics (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
- Planar Illumination Modules (AREA)
Abstract
A variety of illumination devices are disclosed that are configured to manipulate light provided by one or more light-emitting elements (LEEs). In general, embodiments of the illumination devices feature one or more optical couplers that redirect illumination from the LEEs to a reflector which then directs the light into a range of angles. In some embodiments, the illumination device includes a second reflector that reflects at least some of the light from the first reflector. In certain embodiments, the illumination device includes a light guide that guides light from the collector to the first reflector. The components of the illumination device can be configured to provide illumination devices that can provide a variety of intensity distributions. Such illumination devices can be configured to provide light for particular lighting applications, including office lighting, task lighting, cabinet lighting, garage lighting, wall wash, stack lighting, and downlighting.
Description
- This application is a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/205,548, filed on Aug. 8, 2011 and of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/570,243, filed on Aug. 8, 2012. This application also claims benefit of the following provisional applications: Provisional Application No. 61/594,849, filed on Feb. 3, 2012; Provisional Application No. 61/594,954, filed on Feb. 3, 2012; Provisional Application No. 61/603,205, filed on Feb. 24, 2012; and Provisional Application No. 61/640,719, filed on Apr. 30, 2012. The entire contents of each of these priority applications are hereby incorporated by reference.
- Light sources are used in a variety of applications, such as providing general illumination and providing light for electronic displays (e.g., LCDs). Historically, incandescent light sources have been widely used for general illumination purposes. Incandescent light sources produce light by heating a filament wire to a high temperature until it glows. The hot filament is protected from oxidation in the air with a glass enclosure that is filled with inert gas or evacuated. Incandescent light sources are gradually being replaced in many applications by other types of electric lights, such as fluorescent lamps, compact fluorescent lamps (CFL), cold cathode fluorescent lamps (CCFL), high-intensity discharge lamps, and light-emitting diodes (LEDs).
- A variety of luminaires (also referred to as illumination devices) are disclosed that are configured to manipulate light provided by one or more light-emitting elements (LEEs). In general, embodiments of the luminaires feature one or more optical couplers (e.g., parabolic reflectors) that redirect illumination from the LEEs to a reflector which then directs the light into a range of angles. In some embodiments, the luminaire includes a second reflector that reflects at least some of the light from the first reflector. In certain embodiments, the luminaire includes a light guide that guides light from the optical coupler to the first reflector. The components of the luminaire can be configured in a variety of ways so a variety of intensity distributions can be output by the luminaire. Such luminaires can be configured to provide light for particular lighting applications, including office lighting, task lighting, cabinet lighting, garage lighting, wall wash, stack lighting, and down-lighting.
- Among other advantages, embodiments of the luminaires can provide inexpensive illumination solutions with highly uniform illumination and chromaticity, also referred to as color, in ranges of angles tailored for specific lighting applications.
- In one aspect, an illumination device includes a substrate having first and second opposing surfaces, such that each of the first and second surfaces are elongated and have a longitudinal dimension and a transverse dimension shorter than the longitudinal dimension; a plurality of light-emitting elements (LEE) arranged on the first surface of the substrate and distributed along the longitudinal dimension, such that the LEEs emit, during operation, light in a first angular range with respect to a normal to the first surface of the substrate; one or more solid primary optics arranged in an elongated configuration along the longitudinal dimension of the first surface and coupled with the LEEs, the one or more solid primary optics being shaped to redirect light received from the LEEs in the first angular range, and to provide the redirected light in a second angular range, a divergence of the second angular range being smaller than a divergence of the first angular range at least in a plane perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension of the first surface of the substrate; a solid light guide comprising input and output ends, the input and output ends of the solid light guide being elongated in the longitudinal dimension and having substantially the same shape, where the input end of the solid light guide is coupled to the one or more solid primary optics to receive the light provided by the solid primary optic in the second angular range, and the solid light guide is shaped to guide the light received from the solid primary optic in the second angular range and to provide the guided light in substantially the same second angular range with respect to the first surface of the substrate at the output end of the solid light guide; and a solid secondary optic comprising an input end, a redirecting surface opposing the input end and first and second output surfaces, such that each of the input end, and redirecting, first output and second output surfaces of the solid secondary optic are elongated along the longitudinal dimension. The input end of the solid secondary optic is coupled to the output end of the solid light guide to receive the light provided by the solid light guide in the second angular range. The redirecting surface has first and second portions that reflect the light received at the input end of the solid secondary optic in the second angular range, and provide the reflected light in third and fourth angular ranges with respect to the normal to the first surface of the substrate towards the first and second output surfaces, respectively, where at least prevalent directions of propagation of light in the third and fourth angular ranges are different from each other and from a prevalent direction of propagation of light in the second angular range at least perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension of the first surface of the substrate. The first output surface is shaped to refract the light provided by the first portion of the redirecting surface in the third angular range as first refracted light, and to output the first refracted light in a fifth angular range with respect to the normal to the first surface of the substrate outside the first output surface of the solid secondary optic, and the second output surface is shaped to refract the light provided by the second portion of the redirecting surface in the fourth angular range as second refracted light, and to output the second refracted light in a sixth angular range with respect to the normal of the first surface of the substrate outside the second output surface of the solid secondary optic.
- The foregoing and other embodiments can each optionally include one or more of the following features, alone or in combination. The illumination device can further include a tertiary optic including a first reflector elongated along the longitudinal dimension, the first reflector at least in part facing the first output surface of the solid secondary optic, wherein the first reflector is shaped to reflect at least some of the light output by the first output surface of the solid secondary optic in the fifth angular range as first reflected light in a seventh angular range with respect to the normal to the first surface of the substrate, wherein at least a prevalent direction of propagation of light of the seventh angular range is different from a prevalent direction of propagation of light of the fifth angular range at least in a plane perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension, such that a first portion of the intensity distribution output by the illumination device during operation includes at least some of the first reflected light. The first reflector can be coupled to an edge of the first output surface of the solid secondary optic, and at least a portion of the first reflector is an involute of at least a portion of the first output surface of the solid secondary optic. The tertiary optic can further include a second reflector elongated along the longitudinal dimension, the second reflector facing the second output surface of the solid secondary optic, wherein the second reflector is shaped to reflect at least some of the light output by the second output surface of the solid secondary optic in the sixth angular range as second reflected light in an eighth angular range with respect to the normal to the first surface of the substrate, wherein at least a prevalent direction of propagation of light of the eighth angular range is different from a prevalent direction of propagation of light of the sixth angular range at least in a plane perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension, such that the first portion of the intensity distribution output by the illumination device during operation includes at least some of the second reflected light.
- In some implementations, the first and second reflectors at least in part transmit at least some of the light output by the first and second output surfaces of the solid secondary optic in the fifth and sixth angular ranges, respectively, wherein a second portion of the intensity distribution output by the illumination device during operation includes the transmitted light. The first and second reflectors have openings, the openings being positioned to transmit at least some of the light output by the first and second output surfaces of the solid secondary optic in the fifth and sixth angular ranges, respectively, wherein the second portion of the intensity distribution output by the illumination device during operation includes the transmitted light.
- In some implementations, a first parameter combination can include (i) a shape of the one or more primary optics, (ii) a shape of the first portion of the redirecting surface and an orientation thereof relative to the input end of the solid secondary optic, (iii) a shape of the first output surface and an orientation thereof relative to the first portion of the redirecting surface, and (iv) a configuration of the light guide, the first parameter combination determining the fifth angular range, wherein the first parameter combination is tailored such that the fifth angular range matches a predefined fifth angular range; a second parameter combination can include (v) the shape of the one or more primary optics, (vi) a shape of the second portion of the redirecting surface and an orientation thereof relative to the input end of the solid secondary optic, (vii) a shape of the second output surface and an orientation thereof relative to the first portion of the redirecting surface, and (viii) the configuration of the light guide, the second parameter combination determining the sixth angular range, wherein the second parameter combination is tailored such that the sixth angular range matches a predefined sixth angular range, and a relative offset of the first and second portions of the redirecting surface with respect to the input end of the solid secondary optic determines a relative distribution of light between the fifth angular range and the sixth angular range, wherein the relative offset is selected such that the relative distribution matches a predefined relative distribution.
- In some implementations, the first parameter combination further can include an intensity distribution of light provided by the one or more LEEs within the first angular range, the second parameter combination further comprises the intensity distribution of light provided by the one or more LEEs within the first angular range. The illumination device of claim 7, can further include a tertiary optic comprising: a reflector elongated along the longitudinal dimension, the reflector at least in part facing the first output surface of the solid secondary optic, wherein the reflector reflects at least some of the light output by the first output surface of the solid secondary optic in the predefined fifth angular range as first reflected light in a seventh angular range with respect to the normal to the first surface of the substrate, wherein at least a prevalent direction of propagation of light of the seventh angular range is different from a prevalent direction of propagation of light of the predefined fifth angular range at least in a plane perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension, such that a first portion of the intensity distribution output by the illumination device during operation includes the first reflected light, and a second portion of the intensity distribution output by the illumination device during operation includes at least some of the light output by the second output surface of the solid secondary optic within the predefined sixth angular range, wherein the intensity distribution is asymmetric with respect to the first portion and the second portion.
- In some implementations, a system can include N such illumination devices, where N is an even number larger or equal to 4, the N illumination devices being connected to each other to form a polygon, such that the substrates of the connected illumination devices lie in a common plane, and any of pair-wise parallel illumination devices from among the connected illumination devices outputs the first portion of the intensity distribution towards each other, and the second portion of the intensity distribution away from each other. N can be a number larger or equal to 3, the N illumination devices arranged such that the substrates of the illumination devices are substantially coplanar, and each one of the illumination devices can output the first portion of the intensity distribution towards one or more opposite ones of the illumination devices, and emits the second portion of the intensity distribution away from each other. In some implementations, N can be odd number.
- In some implementations, at least one of the input end, the redirecting surface, and the first and second output surfaces of the solid secondary optic has a uniform cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension of the first surface of the substrate. In some implementations, for a cross-sectional plane perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension of the first surface of the substrate, the redirecting surface has an apex that separates the first and second portions of the redirecting surface. In some implementations, for a cross-sectional plane perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension of the first surface of the substrate, the redirecting surface is shaped as an arc of a circle, and the first and second portions of the redirecting surface represent first and second portions of the arc of the circle. In some implementations, for a cross-sectional plane perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension of the first surface of the substrate, either of the first and second portions of the redirecting surface has one or more apexes. In some implementations, for a cross-sectional plane perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension of the first surface of the substrate, the first portion of the redirecting surface is shaped as a plurality of potentially disjoint, piecewise differentiable first curves, and the second portion of the redirecting surface is shaped as a plurality of potentially disjoint, piecewise differentiable second curves.
- In some implementations, the plurality of LEEs and the one or more solid primary optics are integrally formed. In some implementations, the one or more solid primary optics, the solid light guide and the solid secondary optic are integrally formed of one or more transparent materials, and the one or more transparent materials have substantially matching refractive indices.
- An angular range includes (i) a divergence of the angular range and (ii) a prevalent direction of propagation of light in the angular range, wherein the prevalent direction of propagation corresponds to a direction along which a portion of an intensity distribution has a maximum, and the divergence corresponds to a solid angle outside of which the intensity distribution drops below a predefined fraction of the maximum of the intensity distribution.
- In another aspect, an illumination device includes one or more light-emitting elements (LEEs) operatively disposed on one or more substrates and configured to emit light in a first angular range; one or more primary optics optically coupled with the one or more LEEs and configured to direct light received from the one or more LEEs in the first angular range at one or more input ends of the one or more primary optics, and provide directed light in a second angular range at one or more output ends of the one or more primary optics, a divergence of the second angular range being smaller than a divergence of the first angular range; a light guide optically coupled at an input end of the light guide with the one or more output ends of the one or more primary optics, the light guide shaped to guide light received from the one or more primary optics in the second angular range to an output end of the light guide and provide guided light in substantially the same second angular range at the output end of the light guide; and a solid secondary optic optically coupled with the second end of the light guide at an input end of the solid secondary optic to receive light from the light guide, the solid secondary optic having a redirecting surface spaced from the input end of the solid secondary optic and an output surface, the redirecting surface configured to reflect light received at the input end of the solid secondary optic in the second angular range and provide the reflected light in a third angular range towards the output surface, the output surface extending between the input end and the redirecting surface, the output surface being shaped to refract the light provided by the redirecting surface in the third angular range as refracted light and to output the refracted light in a fourth angular range outside the output surface of the solid secondary optic, the solid secondary optic having an elongated configuration to provide the fourth angular range with a longitudinal extension and a shorter, transverse extension.
- The foregoing and other embodiments can each optionally include one or more of the following features, alone or in combination. In some implementations, the illumination device can further comprise a second redirecting surface and a second output surface, the second redirecting surface spaced from the input end of the solid secondary optic and configured to reflect light received at the input end of the solid secondary optic in the second angular range and provide the reflected light in a fifth angular range towards the second output surface, the second output surface extending between the input end and the second redirecting surface, the second output surface being shaped to refract the light provided by the second redirecting surface in the fifth angular range as refracted light in a sixth angular range outside the second output surface of the solid secondary optic, the elongated configuration of the solid secondary optic configured to provide the sixth angular range with a longitudinal dimension. In some implementations, the illumination device can further comprise an elongated first secondary reflector facing the output surface and arranged along the longitudinal extension of the fourth angular range, wherein the first secondary reflector is shaped to reflect at least some of the light output by the output surface of the solid secondary optic in the fourth angular range as first reflected light, and to provide the first reflected light in a seventh angular range, wherein the seventh angular range is different than the fourth angular range.
- In some implementations, the elongated first secondary reflector is spaced apart from the output surface. In some implementations, the illumination device can further comprise an elongated second secondary reflector facing the second output surface and arranged along the longitudinal extension of the sixth angular range, wherein the second secondary reflector is shaped to reflect at least some of the light output by the second output surface of the solid secondary optic in the sixth angular range as second reflected light, and to provide the second reflected light in an eighth angular range, wherein the eighth angular range is different than the sixth angular range. The elongated second secondary reflector can be spaced apart from the second output surface.
- In some implementations, the one or more substrates include one integrally formed, elongated substrate. In some implementations, the one or more substrates include a plurality of substrates, the plurality of substrates having an elongated configuration. In some implementations, one or more of the LEEs and one or more of the primary optics are integrally formed. In some implementations, the one or more primary optics include one integrally formed, elongated primary optic. In some implementations, the one or more primary optics include a plurality of primary optics, the plurality of primary optics having an elongated configuration. In some implementations, the one or more primary optics are configured as one or more solid primary optics and the light guide is configured as a solid light guide. In some implementations, the one or more solid primary optics, the solid light guide and the solid secondary optic are integrally formed of one or more transparent materials, and the one or more transparent materials have substantially matching refractive indices.
- In some implementations, the illumination device can further comprise a reflective layer disposed on the redirecting surface of the solid secondary optic. In some implementations, the redirecting surface of the solid secondary optic is configured to reflect at least some of the light received at the input end of the solid secondary optic in the second angular range via total internal reflection. The longitudinal extension of the fourth angular range is perpendicular to a prevalent direction of propagation of light emitted by the one or more LEEs in the first angular range. In some implementations, a shape of the input end of the light guide matches a shape of the output end of the one or more primary optics. In some implementations, a shape of the input end of the solid secondary optic matches a shape of the output end of the light guide.
- In one aspect, an illumination device includes a substrate having first and second opposing surfaces, such that each of the first and second surfaces are elongated and have a longitudinal dimension and a transverse dimension shorter than the longitudinal dimension; a plurality of light-emitting elements (LEE) arranged on the first surface of the substrate and distributed along the longitudinal dimension, such that the LEEs emit, during operation, light in a first angular range with respect to a normal to the first surface of the substrate; one or more primary optics arranged in an elongated configuration along the longitudinal dimension of the first surface and coupled with the LEEs, the one or more primary optics being shaped to redirect light received from the LEEs in the first angular range, and to provide the redirected light in a second angular range, a divergence of the second angular range being smaller than a divergence of the first angular range at least in a plane perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension of the first surface of the substrate; a secondary optic comprising a redirecting surface elongated along the longitudinal dimension, the redirecting surface of the secondary optic being spaced apart from and facing the one or more of the primary optics, wherein the first and second portions of the redirecting surface reflect light received from the one or more primary optics in the second angular range, and provide the reflected light in third and fourth angular ranges with respect to the normal to the first surface of the substrate, respectively, wherein at least prevalent directions of the third and fourth angular ranges are different from each other and from a prevalent direction of propagation of light of the second angular range at least perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension of the first surface of the substrate; and a tertiary optic comprising a first reflector elongated along the longitudinal dimension, the first secondary reflector being spaced apart from and facing the first portion of the redirecting surface of the secondary optic , wherein the first reflector is shaped to reflect at least some of the light provided by the first portion of the redirecting surface of the secondary optic in the third angular range with respect to the normal of the first surface of the substrate as first reflected light in a fifth angular range with respect to the normal to the first surface of the substrate, wherein the fifth angular range is different than the third angular range, such that a first portion of an intensity distribution output by the illumination device during operation includes at least some of the first reflected light.
- The foregoing and other embodiments can each optionally include one or more of the following features, alone or in combination. A second portion of the intensity distribution output by the illumination device during operation includes at least some of the light provided by the second portion of the redirecting surface of the secondary optic within the fourth angular range. In some implementations, the tertiary optic can further include a second reflector elongated along the longitudinal dimension, the second reflector being spaced apart from and facing the second portion of the redirecting surface of the secondary optic, wherein the second secondary reflector is shaped to reflect at least some of the light provided by the second portion of the redirecting surface of the secondary optic in the fourth angular range as second reflected light, and to provide the second reflected light in a sixth angular range with respect to the normal to the first surface of the substrate, wherein the sixth angular range is different than the fourth angular range, such that the first portion of the intensity distribution output by the illumination device during operation includes at least some of the second reflected light. In some implementations, at least one of the first and second reflectors is thermally coupled with the substrate. In some implementations, the one or more primary optics are configured as one or more solid primary optics. In some implementations, the first and second reflectors at least in part transmit at least some of the light received from the redirecting surface, wherein a second portion of the intensity distribution output by the illumination device during operation includes the transmitted light. In some implementations, the first and second reflectors have openings configured to provide the transmitted light. In some implementations, the first and second reflectors are arranged to have partial overlap with the fourth and sixth angular ranges, such that a second portion of the intensity distribution output by the illumination device during operation includes at least some of the light provided by the first and second redirecting surfaces that passes the first and second reflectors without being reflected.
- A first parameter combination can include (i) an intensity distribution of light provided by the one or more LEEs within the first angular range, (ii) a shape of the one or more primary optics, and (iii) a shape of the first portion of the redirecting surface and an orientation thereof, the first parameter combination determining the fifth angular range, wherein the first parameter combination is tailored such that the fifth angular range matches a predefined fifth angular range; a second parameter combination comprises (iv) an intensity distribution of light provided by the one or more LEEs within the first angular range, (v) a shape of the one or more primary optics, and (vi) a shape of the second portion of the redirecting surface and an orientation thereof, the second parameter combination determining the sixth angular range, wherein the second parameter combination is tailored such that the sixth angular range matches a predefined sixth angular range, and a relative offset of the first and second portions of the redirecting surface with respect to the second angular range determines a relative distribution of light between the fifth angular range and the sixth angular range, wherein the relative offset is selected such that the relative distribution matches a predefined relative distribution.
- In some implementations, a first portion of the intensity distribution output by the illumination device during operation includes the first reflected light, and a second portion of the intensity distribution output by the illumination device during operation includes at least some of the light reflected from the second redirecting surface, wherein the intensity distribution is asymmetric with respect to the first portion and the second portion. In some implementations, at least one of the first and second reflector comprises a curved portion and a substantially planar portion. In some implementations, a system can include N such illumination devices, where N is a number larger or equal to 3, the N illumination devices arranged such that the substrates of the illumination devices are substantially coplanar, and each one of the illumination devices outputs the first portion of the intensity distribution towards one or more opposite ones of the illumination devices, and emits the second portion of the intensity distribution away from each other. In some implementations, N can be an odd number. E.g., N equals 4.
- In some implementations, the tertiary optics of the illumination devices comprise a common reflector. In some implementations, the redirecting surface comprises a reflective material, where the reflective material includes one or more of Ag or A1. In some implementations, the secondary optic has a uniform cross-sectional shape along the longitudinal dimension of the first surface of the substrate. In some implementations, at least one of the first and second portions of the redirecting surface has a uniform cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension of the first surface of the substrate.
- In some implementations, for a cross-sectional plane perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension of the first surface of the substrate, the redirecting surface has an apex that separates the first and second portions of the redirecting surface. In some implementations, the apex of the redirecting surface is a rounded vertex with a non-zero radius of curvature. In some implementations, the first and second portions of the redirecting surface have first and second arcuate shapes in the cross-sectional plane perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension of the first surface of the substrate. In some implementations, the first and second portions of the redirecting surface have one or more first and second linear shapes in the cross-sectional plane perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension of the first surface of the substrate, such that the apex has a v-shape in the cross-sectional plane. In some implementations, for a cross-sectional plane perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension of the first surface of the substrate, the redirecting surface is shaped as an arc of a circle, and the first and second portions of the redirecting surface represent first and second portions of the arc of the circle. In some implementations, the first and second portions of the redirecting surface are separated, at least in part, by a slot, and for a cross-sectional plane perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension of the first surface of the substrate that intersects the slot, first and second curves corresponding to the first and second portions of the redirecting surface are separated by a discontinuity.
- In some implementations, at least portions of the first and second portions of the redirecting surface partially transmit light. In some implementations, either of the first and second portions of the redirecting surface comprise one or more slots, and for a cross-sectional plane perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension of the first surface of the substrate that intersects the one or more slots, first and second curves corresponding to the first and second portions of the redirecting surface comprise one or more discontinuities associated with the one or more slots. In some implementations, for a cross-sectional plane perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension of the first surface of the substrate, either of the first and second portions of the redirecting surface has one or more apexes. In some implementations, for a cross-sectional plane perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension of the first surface of the substrate, the first portion of the redirecting surface is shaped as a plurality of potentially disjoint, piecewise differentiable first curves, and the second portion of the redirecting surface is shaped as a plurality of potentially disjoint, piecewise differentiable second curves.
- In some implementations, the substrate is integrally formed. In some implementations, the substrate comprises a plurality of substrate tiles distributed in an elongated configuration, each of the substrate tiles corresponding to one or more of the plurality of LEEs. In some implementations, the one or more solid primary optics comprise one integrally formed, elongated primary optic. In some implementations, the one or more primary optics comprise a plurality of primary optics, the plurality of primary optics distributed in an elongated configuration. In some implementations, the plurality of LEEs and the one or more primary optics are integrally formed.
- An angular range comprises (i) a divergence of the angular range and (ii) a prevalent direction of propagation of light in the angular range, wherein the prevalent direction of propagation corresponds to a direction along which a portion of an intensity distribution has a maximum, and the divergence corresponds to a solid angle outside of which the intensity distribution drops below a predefined fraction of the maximum of the intensity distribution. In some implementations, the predefined fraction is 5%.
- In one aspect, an illumination device includes one or more light-emitting elements (LEEs) operatively disposed on one or more substrates and configured to emit light in a first angular range; one or more primary optics optically coupled with the one or more LEEs and configured to direct light received from the one or more LEEs in the first angular range and provide directed light in a second angular range, the second angular range being smaller than the first angular range; and a secondary optic spaced apart from the one or more primary optics and arranged to receive light from the one or more primary optics in the second angular range, the secondary optic having a redirecting surface configured to reflect light received from the one or more primary optics in the second angular range and provide the reflected light in a third angular range, the third angular range being different from the second angular range, the secondary optic having an elongated configuration to provide the third angular range with a longitudinal extension and a shorter, transverse extension.
- The foregoing and other embodiments can each optionally include one or more of the following features, alone or in combination. In some implementations, the illumination device can further include a second redirecting surface, the second redirecting surface configured to reflect light received from the one or more primary optics in the second angular range and provide the reflected light in a fourth angular range, the fourth angular range being different from the second angular range and the third angular range, the elongated configuration of the secondary optic configured to provide the fourth angular range with a longitudinal extension. In some implementations, the illumination device can further include an elongated first secondary reflector being spaced apart from and facing the redirecting surface and arranged along the longitudinal extension of the third angular range, wherein the first secondary reflector is shaped to reflect at least some of the light received from the redirecting surface in the third angular range as first reflected light, and to provide the first reflected light in a fifth angular range, wherein the fifth angular range is different than the third angular range at least perpendicular to the longitudinal extension of the third angular range. In some implementations, the illumination device can further include an elongated second secondary reflector being spaced apart from and facing the redirecting surface and arranged along the longitudinal extension of the fourth angular range, wherein the second secondary reflector is shaped to reflect at least some of the light received from the second redirecting surface in the fourth angular range as second reflected light, and to provide the second reflected light in a sixth angular range, wherein the sixth angular range is different than the fourth angular range at least perpendicular to the longitudinal extension of the fourth angular range.
- In some implementations, the one or more substrates include one integrally formed, elongated substrate. In some implementations, the one or more substrates include a plurality of substrates, the plurality of substrates having an elongated configuration. In some implementations, one or more of the LEEs and one or more of the primary optics are integrally formed. In some implementations, the one or more primary optics include one integrally formed, elongated primary optic. In some implementations, the one or more primary optics include a plurality of primary optics, the plurality of primary optics having an elongated configuration. In some implementations, the one or more primary optics are configured as one or more solid primary optics. In some implementations, the longitudinal extension of the third angular range is perpendicular to a prevalent direction of propagation of light emitted by the one or more LEEs in the first angular range.
- In one aspect, an illumination device includes one or more light-emitting elements (LEEs) operatively disposed on a first surface of a substrate and configured to emit light in a first angular range; one or more primary optics optically coupled with the one or more LEEs and configured to direct light received from the one or more LEEs in the first angular range and provide directed light in a second angular range with respect to the first surface of the substrate, the second angular range being smaller than the first angular range; a secondary optic spaced apart from the one or more primary optics and arranged to receive light from the one or more primary optics in the second angular range, the secondary optic having a redirecting surface having and apex facing the one or more primary optics and configured to reflect light received from the one or more primary optics in the second angular range and provide the reflected light in a third angular range with respect to the first surface of the substrate, the third angular range being different from the second angular range, the secondary optic defining an optical axis through the apex; and a secondary reflector spaced apart from and facing the redirecting surface, the secondary reflector shaped to reflect at least some of the light received from the redirecting surface in the third angular range as first reflected light, and to provide the first reflected light in a fifth angular range with respect to the first surface of the substrate, wherein the fifth angular range is different than the third angular range at least within a sectional plane through the optical axis.
- The foregoing and other embodiments can each optionally include one or more of the following features, alone or in combination. In some implementations, the secondary optic has rotational symmetry about the optical axis through the apex. In some implementations, one or more cross sections of at least a portion of at least one of the primary optics, the secondary optic and the secondary reflector comprise a plurality of at least one of a straight and an arcuate portion. In some implementations, the one or more cross sections form an N-sided polygon. E.g., N is an odd number. In some implementations, the polygon is a regular polygon. In some implementations, the one or more cross sections refer to planes perpendicular to the optical axis of the secondary optic. In some implementations, the one or more cross sections refer to planes parallel to the optical axis of the secondary optic. In some implementations, one or more of the LEEs, one or more of the primary optics, and the secondary reflector have rotational symmetry about the optical axis of the secondary optic. In some implementations, the rotational symmetry is a discrete rotational symmetry. In some implementations, the rotational symmetry of the secondary optic is a discrete rotational symmetry. In some implementations, one or more of the LEEs, one or more of the primary optics, the secondary optic and the secondary reflector are asymmetric with respect to the optical axis of the secondary optic.
- In some implementations, a parameter combination comprises (i) a shape of the one or more primary optics, (ii) a shape of the redirecting surface and an orientation thereof relative to the one or more primary optics, and (iii) an intensity distribution of light provided by the one or more LEEs within the first angular range; the parameter combination determining the third angular range, wherein the parameter combination is tailored such that the third angular range matches a predefined third angular range. In some implementations, a relative offset of one or more of the LEEs, one or more of the primary optics, and the secondary optic with respect to one or more of one or more of the LEEs, one or more of the primary optics, and the secondary optic determines an asymmetry of the third angular range, wherein the relative offset is selected such that the asymmetry of the third angular range matches a predefined asymmetry. In some implementations, the one or more LEEs provide an asymmetric first angular range and the parameter combination is tailored to provide a substantially asymmetric predefined third angular range. In some implementations, the one or more LEEs provide a substantially symmetric first angular range and the parameter combination is tailored to provide a substantially asymmetric predefined third angular range.
- In some implementations, a first portion of the intensity distribution output by the illumination device during operation includes at least some of the first reflected light. In some implementations, the secondary reflector at least in part transmits at least some of the light received from the redirecting surface, wherein a second portion of the intensity distribution output by the illumination device during operation includes the transmitted light. In some implementations, the first and second reflectors have openings configured to provide the transmitted light. In some implementations, the secondary reflector is arranged to have partial overlap with the third angular range, such that a second portion of the intensity distribution output by the illumination device during operation includes at least some of the light provided by the redirecting surfaces that passes the secondary reflector without being reflected. In some implementations, the redirecting surface comprises a reflective material, where the reflective material includes one or more of Ag or Al.
- In some implementations, the apex of the redirecting surface is a rounded vertex with a non-zero radius of curvature. In some implementations, the redirecting surface has one or more linear shapes in one or more cross-sectional planes through the optical axis of the secondary optic. In some implementations, the redirecting surface is shaped as arcs of a circle. In some implementations, the redirecting surface includes an opening. In some implementations, at least portions the redirecting surface partially transmit light. In some implementations, for a cross-sectional plane the redirecting surface is shaped as a plurality of potentially disjoint, piecewise differentiable curves. In some implementations, the substrate is integrally formed. in some implementations, the substrate comprises a plurality of substrate tiles distributed in an elongated configuration, each of the substrate tiles corresponding to one or more of the LEEs. In some implementations, the one or more primary optics are integrally formed. In some implementations, the one or more LEEs and the one or more primary optics are integrally formed.
- An angular range comprises (i) a divergence of the angular range and (ii) a prevalent direction of propagation of light in the angular range, wherein the prevalent direction of propagation corresponds to a direction along which a portion of an intensity distribution has a maximum, and the divergence corresponds to a solid angle outside of which the intensity distribution drops below a predefined fraction of the maximum of the intensity distribution. E.g., the predefined fraction is 5%.
- In one aspect, an illumination device includes one or more light-emitting elements (LEEs) operatively disposed on a substrate 3476 and configured to emit light in a first angular range with respect to a normal to a first surface of the substrate; one or more primary optics optically coupled with the one or more LEEs and configured to direct light received from the one or more LEEs in the first angular range at one or more input ends of the one or more primary optics, and provide directed light in a second angular range at one or more output ends of the one or more primary optics, a divergence of the second angular range being smaller than a divergence of the first angular range; a light guide optically coupled at an input end of the light guide with the one or more output ends of the one or more primary optics, the light guide shaped to guide light received from the one or more primary optics in the second angular range to an output end of the light guide and provide guided light in substantially the same second angular range with respect to the first surface of the substrate at the output end of the light guide; and a secondary optic optically coupled with the second end of the light guide at an input end of the secondary optic to receive light from the light guide, the secondary optic having a redirecting surface spaced from the input end of the secondary optic and an output surface, the redirecting surface having an apex facing the input end of the secondary optic and configured to reflect light received at the input end of the secondary optic in the second angular range and provide the reflected light in a third angular range with respect to the normal to the first surface of the substrate towards the output surface, the output surface shaped to refract the light provided by the redirecting surface in the third angular range as refracted light and to output the refracted light in a fourth angular range with respect to the normal to the first surface of the substrate outside the output surface of the secondary optic, the secondary optic defining an optical axis through the apex; wherein the one or more primary optics, the light guide and the secondary optic are integrally formed of a transparent material.
- The foregoing and other embodiments can each optionally include one or more of the following features, alone or in combination. In some implementations, the secondary optic has rotational symmetry about the optical axis through the apex. In some implementations, the illumination device can further include a secondary reflector facing the output surface, the secondary reflector shaped to reflect at least some of the light output by the output surface of the secondary optic in the fourth angular range as first reflected light, and to provide the first reflected light in a fifth angular range with respect to the normal to the first surface of the substrate, wherein the fifth angular range is different than the fourth angular range.
- In some implementations, one or more cross sections of at least a portion of at least one of the primary optics, the light guide, the secondary optic and the secondary reflector comprise a plurality of at least one of a straight and an arcuate portion. In some implementations, the one or more cross sections form an N-sided polygon. E.g., N is an odd number. In some implementations, the polygon is a regular polygon. In some implementations, the one or more cross sections refer to planes perpendicular to the optical axis of the secondary optic. In some implementations, the one or more cross sections refer to planes parallel to the optical axis of the secondary optic. In some implementations, one or more of the LEEs, one or more of the primary optics, the light guide and the secondary reflector have rotational symmetry about the optical axis of the secondary optic. In some implementations, the rotational symmetry is a discrete rotational symmetry. In some implementations, the rotational symmetry of the secondary optic is a discrete rotational symmetry. In some implementations, one or more of the LEEs, one or more of the primary optics, the secondary optic and the secondary reflector are asymmetric with respect to the optical axis of the secondary optic. In some implementations, at least a portion of at least one of the primary optics, the light guide, the secondary optic and the secondary reflector has a uniform cross section along an extension of the corresponding portion.
- A parameter combination comprises (i) a shape of the one or more primary optics, (ii) a shape of the redirecting surface and an orientation thereof relative to the input end of the secondary optic, (iii) a shape of the output surface and an orientation thereof relative to the redirecting surface, (iv) a configuration of the light guide, and (v) an intensity distribution of light provided by the one or more LEEs within the first angular range; the parameter combination determining the fourth angular range, wherein the parameter combination is tailored such that the fourth angular range matches a predefined fourth angular range. In some implementations, a relative offset of one or more of the LEEs, one or more of the primary optics, the light guide, and the secondary optic with respect to one or more of one or more of the LEEs, one or more of the primary optics, the light guide and the secondary optic determines an asymmetry of the fourth angular range, wherein the relative offset is selected such that the asymmetry of the fourth angular range matches a predefined asymmetry.
- In some implementations, the one or more LEEs provide an asymmetric first angular range and the parameter combination is tailored to provide a substantially asymmetric predefined fourth angular range. In some implementations, the one or more LEEs provide a substantially symmetric first angular range and the parameter combination is tailored to provide a substantially asymmetric predefined fourth angular range. In some implementations, the secondary reflector is spaced apart from the output surface of the secondary optic. In some implementations, the secondary reflector is coupled to an edge of the output surface of the secondary optic, and at least a portion of the secondary reflector is an involute of at least a portion of the output surface of the solid secondary optic with respect to at least one cross section of the illumination device through the optical axis. In some implementations, a first portion of the intensity distribution output by the illumination device during operation includes at least some of the first reflected light. In some implementations, the secondary reflector at least in part transmits at least some of the light output by the output surface of the solid secondary optic in the fourth angular range, wherein a second portion of the intensity distribution output by the illumination device during operation includes the transmitted light. In some implementations, the secondary reflector has openings, the openings being positioned to transmit at least some of the light output by the output surface of the solid secondary optic in the fourth angular range, wherein the second portion of the intensity distribution output by the illumination device during operation includes the transmitted light. In some implementations, the secondary reflector includes one or more transparent portions, the one or more transparent portions being positioned to transmit at least some of the light output by the output surface of the solid secondary optic in the fourth angular range, wherein the second portion of the intensity distribution output by the illumination device during operation includes the transmitted light. In some implementations, the secondary reflector is arranged to have partial overlap with the fourth angular range, such that a second portion of the intensity distribution output by the illumination device during operation includes at least some of the light output by the output surface of the solid secondary optic within the fourth angular range that passes the secondary reflector without being reflected.
- In some implementations, the secondary reflector is thermally coupled with the substrate. In some implementations, the redirecting surface comprises a reflective material, where the reflective material includes one or more of Ag or Al. In some implementations, apex of the redirecting surface is a rounded vertex with a non-zero radius of curvature. In some implementations, the redirecting surface has arcuate shapes in a cross-sectional plane parallel to the optical axis of the secondary optic. In some implementations, the redirecting surface has linear shapes in a cross-sectional plane parallel to the optical axis, such that the apex has a v-shape in the cross-sectional plane. In some implementations, for a cross-sectional plane parallel to the optical axis of the secondary optic, the redirecting surface is shaped as an arc of a circle. In some implementations, the redirecting surface has an opening. In some implementations, at least portions of the redirecting surface partially transmit light. In some implementations, In some implementations, for a cross-sectional plane through the optical axis of the secondary optic, the first portion of the redirecting surface is shaped as a plurality of potentially disjoint, piecewise differentiable first curves.
- In some implementations, the substrate is integrally formed. In some implementations, the substrate comprises a plurality of substrate tiles. In some implementations, oone or more primary optics are integrally formed. In some implementations, the one or more LEEs and the one or more primary optics are integrally formed.
- An angular range comprises (i) a divergence of the angular range and (ii) a prevalent direction of propagation of light in the angular range, wherein the prevalent direction of propagation corresponds to a direction along which a portion of an intensity distribution has a maximum, and the divergence corresponds to a solid angle outside of which the intensity distribution drops below a predefined fraction of the maximum of the intensity distribution. The predefined fraction can be 5%.
- In one aspect, an illumination device includes a substrate having first and second opposing surfaces, such that each of the first and second surfaces are elongated and have a longitudinal dimension and a transverse dimension shorter than the longitudinal dimension; a plurality of light-emitting elements (LEE) arranged on the first surface of the substrate and distributed along the longitudinal dimension, such that the LEEs emit, during operation, light in a first angular range with respect to a normal to the first surface of the substrate; one or more primary optics arranged in an elongated configuration along the longitudinal dimension of the first surface and coupled with the LEEs, the one or more primary optics being shaped to redirect light received from the LEEs in the first angular range, and to provide the redirected light in a second angular range, a divergence of the second angular range being smaller than a divergence of the first angular range at least in a plane perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension of the first surface of the substrate; and a secondary optic comprising a secondary reflector elongated along the longitudinal dimension, the secondary reflector being spaced apart from and facing the one or more primary optics, wherein the secondary reflector is shaped to reflect at least some of the light provided by the one or more primary optics in the second angular range as reflected light in a third angular range with respect to the normal to the first surface of the substrate, wherein the third angular range is different than the second angular range, such that at least some of the reflected light represents a first portion of the intensity distribution output by the illumination device during operation.
- The foregoing and other embodiments can each optionally include one or more of the following features, alone or in combination. In some implementations, the one or more primary optics comprises one integrally formed primary optic.
- In one aspect, a luminaire includes at least one light-emitting diode (LED); a light guide including two opposing planar surfaces both extending from a first end to a second end, the light guide being positioned to receive at the first end light emitted by the light-emitting diode and guide it between the planar surfaces to the second end; and an optical extractor optically coupled to the light guide at the second end, the optical extractor including a first optical interface and a second optical interface, the first optical interface being positioned to reflect light exiting the light guide and the second optical interface being configured to transmit light reflected by the first optical interface.
- The foregoing and other embodiments can each optionally include one or more of the following features, alone or in combination. In some implementations, the at least one LED includes a plurality of LEDs arranged in a row. In some implementations, each of the at least one LED can have substantially the same emission spectrum. In some implementations, each of the at least one LED can emit white light during operation. In some implementations, at least some of the at least one LED can be colored LEDs. In some implementations, at least some of the at least one LED can be blue, violet, or ultra-violet LEDs.
- In some implementations, the luminaire can include a wavelength conversion material positioned remote from the at least one LED in a path of light emitted by the at least one LED, the wavelength conversion material being arranged to convert at least some of the light from the at least one LED into light of a longer wavelength. In some implementations, at least one LED can have a nominal power in a range from 0.1 W to 2 W.
- In some implementations, the luminaire can include an optical element positioned to receive light emitted from the at least one LED and redirect the light to the first end of the light guide. In some implementations, the optical element can include at least one optical interface shaped to collimate the light in at least one dimension. For example, the at least one optical interface of the optical element is shaped to collimate the light in two dimensions. As another example, the at least one optical interface of the optical element has a parabolic cross-sectional profile. As another example, the optical element is optically coupled to the first end of the light guide. As another example, the optical element is integrally-formed with the light guide.
- In some implementations, the opposing planar surfaces of the light guide can be parallel. In some implementations, the light guide can be formed from a dielectric material. In some implementations, the light guide can be a rectangular piece of dielectric material having a length, a width, and a thickness, where the width corresponds to the dimension of the rectangle between the first and second ends, the thickness corresponds to the dimension between the opposing planar surfaces, and the length corresponds to the dimension orthogonal to the width and the thickness, the length being larger than the width and the thickness. For example, the width is larger than the thickness. The thickness can be 1 cm or less, for instance. As another example, the dielectric material is an organic polymer. As another example, the organic polymer is acrylic. As another example, the dielectric material is an inorganic glass.
- In some implementations, for a cross-sectional plane, the first optical interface can have a shape that includes a vertex. For example, the optical extractor has a uniform cross-sectional shape along an axis extending orthogonal to the cross-sectional plane. As another example, the first optical interface includes a first planar portion and a second planar portion that meet at an edge corresponding to the vertex in the cross-sectional plane. Further, planar light guide surfaces can be arranged symmetrically about a notional plane extending between the first and second ends and the edge of the first optical interface lies in the notional plane. Furthermore, the first and second planar portions can be arranged symmetrically with respect to notional plane. Also, the first and second planar portions can be arranged asymmetrically with respect to the notional plane.
- In some implementations, the first optical interface of the optical extractor can have a v-shape in the cross-sectional plane. In some implementations, the second interface has a portion having an arcuate shape in the cross-sectional plane. The arcuate portion can have a constant radius of curvature.
- In some implementations, the optical extractor can include a portion formed from a dielectric material, where a first surface of the portion corresponds to the first optical interface and a second surface of the portion corresponds to the second optical interface. In some implementations, the optical extractor can include a portion formed from a second material adjacent to the first surface, the first optical interface being the interface between the portion of the second material and the portion of the dielectric material. For example, the second material is a reflective material. As another example, the second material is a metal. For instance, the metal can be aluminum.
- In some implementations, the optical extractor can include a cylindrical element having a cylinder axis and a wedge-shaped groove extending along a cylinder axis. For example, the cylindrical element is formed from a dielectric material and the optical extractor further includes a second material disposed on the surfaces of the wedge-shaped groove to for the first optical interface. As another example, the surface of the wedge-shaped groove is the first optical interface and the cylindrical surface of the cylindrical element is the second optical interface.
- In some implementations, the light guide can be optically coupled to the optical extractor. In some implementations, the light guide can be integrally-formed with the optical extractor. In some implementations, for a cross-sectional plane, the first optical interface has a first arcuate shape and the second optical interface has a second arcuate shape. In some implementations, the optical extractor can have a uniform cross-sectional shape along an axis extending orthogonal to the cross-sectional plane. In some implementations, the optical extractor can extend beyond a first of the planar surfaces in the cross-sectional plane in the direction normal to the first planar surface, but does not extend beyond the second planar surface in the direction normal to the second planar surface.
- In some implementations, the optical element and optical extractor can be shaped so that, in a first plane, the luminaire directs substantially all of the light into a range of solid angles from −45 degrees to 45 degrees, where 0 degrees corresponds to a normal of a planar surface of the light guide. In some implementations, the optical element and optical extractor can be shaped so that the luminaire asymmetrically distributes the light about 0 degrees in the first plane. In some implementations, the optical element and optical extractor can be shaped so that, in a second plane orthogonal to the first plane, the luminaire directs substantially all of the light into a range of solid angles from −45 degrees to 45 degrees, where 0 degrees corresponds to the normal of the planar surface of the light guide. In some implementations, for a cross-sectional plane, the second optical interface can have a shape that is an arc of constant radius, R, and the first optical interface is disposed within a notional circle of radius R/n concentric with the arc, where n is a refractive index of a material from which the optical extractor is formed.
- In some implementations, the luminaire can include a reflector positioned remote from the optical extractor and positioned to receive at least some of the light transmitted by the second optical interface. The reflector can include a first portion and a second portion, the first and second portions extending on opposing sides of the light guide. Further, the first and second portions each can include a curved surface positioned to receive light transmitted by the second optical interface. Furthermore, in a cross-sectional plane, the curved surfaces can be concave in shape. Also, the curved surfaces can be specularly reflecting surfaces. Further, the first and second portions can be perforated, the openings being positioned to transmit at least some of the light transmitted by the second optical interface.
- In some implementations, the optical element, optical extractor, and reflector can be shaped so that, in a first plane, the luminaire directs the light into a range of solid angles substantially symmetrically about 0 degrees, where 0 degrees corresponds to the direction extending from the first end of the light guide to the second end. In some implementations, the optical element, optical extractor, and reflector can be shaped so that, in a first plane, the luminaire directs the light into a range of angles substantially asymmetrically about 0 degrees, where 0 degrees corresponds to the direction extending from the first end of the light guide to the second end. In some implementations, the optical element, optical extractor, and reflector can shaped so that, in a first plane, the luminaire directs at least some of the light into a range of angles from −45 degrees to 45 degrees, where 0 degrees corresponds to the direction extending from the first end of the light guide to the second end. In some implementations, the optical element, optical extractor, and reflector can be shaped so that, in the first plane, the luminaire directs substantially all of the light into the range of angles from −45 degrees to 45 degrees. In some implementations, the optical element, optical extractor, and reflector can be shaped so that, in the first plane, the luminaire directs none of the light into any angle from −90 degrees to −45 degrees and from 45 degrees to 90 degrees. In some implementations, the optical element, optical extractor, and reflector can be shaped so that, in the first plane, the luminaire directs at least some of the light into a range of angles from −110 degrees to −90 degrees and from 90 degrees to 110 degrees. In some implementations, the optical element, optical extractor, and reflector are shaped so that, in a first plane, the luminaire directs at least some of the light into a range of angles from −90 degrees to −45 degrees and from 45 degrees to 90 degrees, where 0 degrees corresponds to the direction extending from the first end of the light guide to the second end.
- In some implementations, the optical element, optical extractor, and reflector can be shaped so that, in the first plane, the luminaire directs substantially all of the light into the range of angles from −90 degrees to −45 degrees and from 45 degrees to 90 degrees. In some implementations, the optical element, optical extractor, and reflector are shaped so that, in the first plane, the luminaire is brightest in a range of angles from −75 degrees to −60 degrees and from 60 degrees to 75 degrees.
- In another aspect a method includes attaching the luminaire of claim 1 to a ceiling and electrically connecting a power source to the luminaire. In some implementations, the ceiling is a ceiling of a room in a building. In some implementations, the ceiling is a ceiling of a garage.
- In another aspect a luminaire includes at least one light-emitting diode (LED); a light guide including two opposing surfaces both extending from a first end to a second end, the light guide being positioned to receive at the first end light emitted by the light-emitting diode and guide it between the surfaces to the second end; a reflector; and an optical extractor extending along a longitudinal axis orthogonal to a first direction between the first and second ends of the light guide, the optical extractor being remote from the reflector and being optically coupled to the light guide at the second end, the optical extractor being arranged to redirect light exiting the light guide towards the reflector, where the optical extractor and reflector are shaped so that, in a first plane, the luminaire directs at least some of the light into a first range of angles from −90 degrees to 90 degrees and directs substantially none of the light into a second range of angles from −90 degrees to 90 degrees, where 0 degrees corresponds to the first direction.
- In another aspect, an illumination system includes a plurality of luminaires, each luminaire including a plurality of light-emitting diodes (LEDs) arranged along a corresponding first axis; an optical extractor extending along a corresponding longitudinal axis parallel to the first axis; and a light guide positioned to receive at a first end of the light guide light emitted by the light-emitting diodes and guide it to a second end of the light guide, where the optical extractor is optically coupled to the light guide at the second end, the optical extractor being shaped to redirect the light guided by the light guide into a range of angles on either side of the light guide, and where the luminaires are connected to each other to form a polygon such that the longitudinal axes of the connected modules lie in a common plane.
- In some implementations, the polygon has a maximum dimension less than 2 feet. In some implementations, the polygon is a quadrilateral. In some implementations, the polygon includes four or more modules. In some implementations, the optical extractor is shaped to redirect light into different ranges of angles on opposing sides of the light guide. In some implementations, the optical extractor includes a first optical interface positioned to receive the light from the light guide and reflect the light either side of the light guide. For example, for a cross-sectional plane, the first optical interface has a shape that includes a vertex.
- In some implementations, the optical extractor can further include a second optical interface positioned in the path of the light reflected by the first optical interface and configured to transmit the light into the range of angles. For a cross-sectional plane, the second interface can have a portion having an arcuate shape. The arcuate portion can have a constant radius of curvature.
- In another aspect, a luminaire includes a plurality of light-emitting diodes (LEDs) extending along a first axis; at least one collector arranged to receive light emitted by the LEDs and redirect the light in a range of directions orthogonal to the first axis, at least partially collimating the light; a first reflective surface extending along a longitudinal axis parallel to the first axis, wherein the first axis and longitudinal axis lie in a common plane and at least a portion of the reflective surface is positioned to receive the light from the at least one collector and reflect the light into a range of angles on only one side of the common plane.
- In some implementations, the at least one collector includes a plurality of collectors, each arranged to receive light emitted by a corresponding one of the plurality of LEDs. In some implementations, the at least one collector includes at least one optical interface shaped to collimate the light in at least one dimension. The at least one optical interface of the optical element can be shaped to collimate the light in two dimensions. In some implementations, for a cross-section, the at least one optical interface of the optical element can have a parabolic shape. In some implementations, the at least one collector can include an element formed from a solid dielectric material, the element being arranged to transmit light from the LEDs towards the first reflective surface. For example, the at least one collector includes a reflective surface arranged to reflect light from the LEDs towards the first reflective surface. As another example, the first reflective surface is a curved surface. The curved surface can be a concave surface. In some implementations, the at least one collector and first reflective surface can be shaped so that the luminaire illuminates only the one side of the common plane.
- In another aspect, an article includes a cabinet; and a luminaire as described for the foregoing implementation mounted to a surface of the cabinet.
- In another aspect, an article includes a piece of furniture having a work surface; the luminaire described herein; and a mounting fixture arranged to position the luminaire to illuminate the work surface.
- In another aspect, a luminaire includes at least one light-emitting diode (LED) positioned at a first plane; a light guide including two opposing surfaces both extending from a first end to a second end, where the first and second ends define a direction orthogonal to the first plane and the light guide is positioned to receive at the first end light emitted by the light-emitting diode and guide it between the surfaces to the second end; a first surface positioned to reflect light exiting the light guide into a range of angles towards the first plane; and a second surface arranged to extend through the range of angles and reflect at least some of the light reflected by the first surface away from the first plane.
- In another aspect, an illumination device includes one or more light-emitting elements (LEEs) operatively disposed on one or more substrates and configured to emit light in a first angular range; one or more primary optics optically coupled with the one or more LEEs and configured to direct light received from the one or more LEEs at one or more input ends of the one or more primary optics, and provide directed light in a second angular range at one or more output ends of the one or more primary optics, a divergence of the second angular range being smaller than a divergence of the first angular range; a light guide optically coupled at an input end of the light guide with the one or more output ends of the one or more primary optics, the light guide shaped to guide light received from the one or more primary optics to an output end of the light guide and provide guided light in a third angular range at the output end of the light guide; and a solid secondary optic optically coupled with the second end of the light guide at an input end of the solid secondary optic to receive light from the light guide, the solid secondary optic having a redirecting surface and an output surface, where the redirecting surface can be spaced from the input end of the solid secondary optic and configured to reflect at least a portion of light received at the input end of the solid secondary optic and provide the reflected light in a fourth angular range towards the output surface, where the solid secondary optic can be further configured to output the reflected light in a fifth angular range outside the output surface of the solid secondary optic, the solid secondary optic having an elongated configuration.
- The foregoing and other embodiments can each optionally include one or more of the following features, alone or in combination. The illumination device can further include a second redirecting surface and a second output surface, the second redirecting surface can be spaced from the input end of the solid secondary optic and configured to reflect light received at the input end of the solid secondary optic and provide the reflected light in a sixth angular range towards the second output surface, where the second output surface can extend between the input end and the second redirecting surface, where the second output surface can be shaped to refract the light provided by the second redirecting surface as refracted light in a seventh angular range outside the second output surface of the solid secondary optic.
- In some implementations, the illumination device can further include an elongated first secondary reflector facing the second output surface, where the first secondary reflector can be shaped to reflect at least some of the light output by the second output surface of the solid secondary optic as second reflected light, and to provide the second reflected light in a ninth angular range, where the ninth angular range is different than the seventh angular range. The illumination device can further include an elongated second secondary reflector facing the output surface, where the second secondary reflector is shaped to reflect at least some of the light output by the output surface of the solid secondary optic as first reflected light, and to provide the first reflected light in an eighth angular range, where the eighth angular range is different than the fifth angular range. The elongated first secondary reflector can be spaced apart from the second output surface.
- In some implementations, the light guide can include a light guide surface connecting the input end of the light guide with the output end of the light guide, where one or more portions of the light guide include scattering centers that are configured to scatter some of the light from within the light guide through one or more portions of the light guide surface. The scattering centers can be disposed within the one or more portions of the light guide or on the light guide surface of the one or more portions of the light guide, and the scattering centers can include at least one of (i) prisms, (ii) high reflectivity translucent contact points, or (iii) discontinuities in the light guide surface.
- In some implementations, the light guide can be deformable about a longitudinal extension of the light guide. In some implementations, the light guide can include two or more light guide elements. In some implementations, the two or more light guide elements can be arranged in parallel. Each light guide element can include an input end and an output end, where the input ends of the two or more light guide elements can be coupled with the one or more output ends of the one or more primary optics, and the output ends of the two or more light guide elements can be spaced apart.
- In some implementations, the light guide can include an input surface at the input end and an output surface at the output end, where an area of the input surface can be substantially the same as an area of the output surface. In some implementations, the light guide can include an input surface at the input end and an output surface at the output end, where an area of the input surface can be different from an area of the output surface. In some implementations, the light guide can include an input surface at the input end and an output surface at the output end, where at least one of the input surface or the output surface can include one or more discontinuities along a longitudinal dimension of the light guide. In some implementations, the one or more substrates can include two or more substrates and the one or more primary optics can include two or more primary optics, where each substrate can be coupled with a primary optic from the two or more primary optics, and where at least two of the two or more substrates can be aligned within different planes and the light input end of the light guide can be shaped to correspond to the output ends of the two or more primary optics.
- In some implementations, the solid secondary optic can further include a second output surface, where the second output surface can be arranged to output at least a portion of the light received at the input end of the solid secondary optic without being reflected by the redirecting surface. The second output surface can also include a light conversion layer. In some implementations, the secondary optic can include two or more secondary optical elements, where the two or more secondary optical elements can be spaced apart, such that a portion of the guided light is output from the light guide in the third angular range.
- In some implementations, the illumination device can further include an elongated secondary reflector facing the output surface, where the secondary reflector can be shaped to reflect at least some of the light output by the output surface of the solid secondary optic as first reflected light, and to provide the first reflected light in an eighth angular range, where the eighth angular range can be different than the fifth angular range. The secondary reflector can include two or more reflector elements, where the two or more reflector elements can have spaced apart transparent portions through which light can be transmitted, where a position of the two or more reflector elements relative to each other can be adjustable to vary an amount of the first reflected light relative to light transmitted through the transparent portions.
- In some implementations, the transparent portions can be openings. In some implementations, at least one or more portions of the secondary reflector can include electrochromic material, where reflective properties of the electrochromic material can be adjustable by applying an electrical charge to vary an amount of the first reflected light. In some implementations, a position of the secondary reflector can be adjustable along a length of the light guide to vary the eighth angular range of the first reflected light. In some implementations, a position of the secondary reflector can be adjustable about a pivot axis substantially parallel to a longitudinal extension of the light guide to vary the eighth angular range of the first reflected light. In some implementations, the secondary reflector can be configured as a replaceable module. In some implementations, the secondary reflector can include transparent portions along a longitudinal extension of the secondary reflector, where a portion of the light output by the output surface of the solid secondary optic can pass through the transparent portions. In some implementations, the transparent portions can be openings. In some implementations, the secondary reflector can include one or more light conversion materials to convert at least a portion of the light output by the output surface of the solid secondary optic. Converting the light output by the output surface of the solid secondary optic can include at least one of converting (i) a chromaticity, (ii) a spectral range, or (iii) an intensity of the light output by the output surface of the solid secondary optic. In some implementations, the elongated secondary reflector can be spaced apart from the output surface.
- In some implementations, the output surface can be shaped to refract the light provided by the redirecting surface as refracted light. In some implementations, the one or more substrates can include one integrally formed, elongated substrate. In some implementations, the one or more substrates can include a plurality of substrates, where the plurality of substrates can have an elongated configuration. In some implementations, one or more of the LEEs and one or more of the primary optics can be integrally formed. In some implementations, the one or more primary optics can include one integrally formed, elongated primary optic. In some implementations, the one or more LEEs can be a plurality of LEEs, and the one or more primary optics can be a plurality of primary optics. In some implementations, the one or more primary optics can include a plurality of primary optics, where the plurality of primary optics can have an elongated configuration. In some implementations, the one or more primary optics can be configured as one or more solid primary optics and the light guide can be configured as a solid light guide. The one or more solid primary optics, the solid light guide and the solid secondary optic can be integrally formed of one or more transparent materials, and the one or more transparent materials can have substantially matching refractive indices.
- In some implementations, walls of the light guide can be parallel planes and the third angular range can be substantially the same as the second angular range. In some implementations, the one or more primary optics can be configured as one or more hollow primary optics and the light guide can be configured as a solid light guide. In some implementations, the one or more primary optics can be configured as one or more solid primary optics and the light guide can be configured as a hollow light guide. In some implementations, the illumination device can further include a reflective layer disposed on the redirecting surface of the solid secondary optic. In some implementations, the redirecting surface of the solid secondary optic can be configured to reflect at least some of the light received at the input end of the solid secondary optic via total internal reflection. In some implementations, a longitudinal extension of the fifth angular range can be perpendicular to a prevalent direction of propagation of light emitted by the one or more LEEs. In some implementations, a shape of the input end of the light guide can match a shape of the output end of the one or more primary optics. In some implementations, a shape of the input end of the solid secondary optic can match a shape of the output end of the light guide.
- The term “optical axis” is used herein to refer to an imaginary line that defines a path along or proximate which light propagates. An optical axis may correlate with one or more axes or planes of symmetry of components of an optical system or apparatus. A plurality of optical axes that refer to a planar or non-planar notional surface may be referred to herein as an optical plane.
- The term “rotational symmetry” is used herein, as the case may be, to refer to invariance under discrete or continuous rotation.
- The terms “collimation” and “collimate” are used herein to refer to the degree of alignment of rays of light or the act of increasing such alignment including the reduction of divergence of the propagation directions of a plurality of light rays, also referred to as a beam of light, or simply light.
- The term “light-emitting element” (LEE), also referred to as a light emitter, is used to define any device that emits radiation in one or more regions of the electromagnetic spectrum from among the visible region, the infrared region and/or the ultraviolet region, when activated. Activation of an LEE can be achieved by applying a potential difference across components of the LEE or passing a current through components of the LEE, for example. A light-emitting element can have monochromatic, quasi-monochromatic, polychromatic or broadband spectral emission characteristics. Examples of light-emitting elements include semiconductor, organic, polymer/polymeric light-emitting diodes, other monochromatic, quasi-monochromatic or other light-emitting elements. Furthermore, the term light-emitting element is used to refer to the specific device that emits the radiation, for example a LED die, and can equally be used to refer to a combination of the specific device that emits the radiation (e.g., a LED die) together with a housing or package within which the specific device or devices are placed. Examples of light emitting elements include also lasers and more specifically semiconductor lasers, such as vertical cavity surface emitting lasers (VCSELs) and edge emitting lasers. Further examples include superluminescent diodes and other superluminescent devices.
- The term “light-converting material” (LCM), also referred to as “wavelength-conversion material” or phosphor is used herein to define a material that absorbs photons according to a first spectral distribution and emits photons according to a second spectral distribution. The terms light conversion, wavelength conversion and/or color conversion are used accordingly. Light-converting material may be referred to as photoluminescent or color-converting material, for example. Light-converting materials may include photoluminescent substances, fluorescent substances, phosphors, quantum dots, semiconductor-based optical converters, or the like. Light-converting materials may include rare earth or other materials including, for example, Ce, Yt, Te, Eu and other rare earth elements, Ce:YAG, TAG, nitride, oxynitride, silicate, CdSe quantum dot material, AlInGaP quantum dot material. As used herein, an LCM is typically configured to generate longer wavelength light from pump light such as visible light or ultraviolet pump light, for example. Different LCM may have different first and/or second spectral distributions.
- As used herein, the term “optical interface” refers to the interface between two materials having different optical properties. Examples of optical interfaces include a surface of an optical element (i.e., the interface between the material forming the optical element and the ambient atmosphere), the interface between adjacent optical elements, and the interface between an optical element and a coating disposed on the elements surface.
- As used herein, providing light in an “angular range” refers to providing light that propagates in a prevalent direction and has a divergence with respect to the propagation direction. In this context, the term “prevalent direction of propagation” refers to a direction along which a portion of an intensity distribution of the propagating light has a maximum. For example, the prevalent direction of propagation associated with the angular range can be an orientation of a lobe of the intensity distribution. Also in this context, the term “divergence” refers to a solid angle outside of which the intensity distribution of the propagating light drops below a predefined fraction of a maximum of the intensity distribution. For example, the divergence associated with the angular range can be the width of the lobe of the intensity distribution. The predefined fraction can be 10%, 5%, 1%, or other values, depending on the lighting application.
- As used herein, the term “about” refers to a +/−10% variation from the nominal value.
- Unless defined otherwise, all technical and scientific terms used herein have the same meaning as commonly understood by one of ordinary skill in the art to which this technology belongs.
-
FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of a luminaire. -
FIGS. 2A-H , 2J-L, and 2N-2O show different aspects of a luminaire. -
FIG. 3 is an intensity profile of an embodiment of a luminaire. -
FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing aspects of a Weierstrass configuration. -
FIG. 5 is a view of an embodiment of a luminaire. -
FIG. 6 is a view of another embodiment of a luminaire. -
FIG. 7 is a view of yet another embodiment of a luminaire. -
FIG. 8 is a view of an embodiment of a troffer luminaire. -
FIG. 9 is an intensity profile of an embodiment of a troffer luminaire. -
FIGS. 10A-10C show aspects of an intensity distribution from an array of troffer luminaires at a target surface. -
FIGS. 11A and 11B are views of an embodiment of a pendant luminaire. -
FIG. 11C is a polar plot of a simulated intensity profile of an embodiment of a pendant luminaire. -
FIGS. 11D-E show views of an example of a mechanically adjustable secondary reflector. -
FIG. 11F shows an example of a secondary reflector with electrochromic material. -
FIG. 12A is a view of an embodiment of a luminaire used to provide direct and indirect components of a light intensity distribution. -
FIG. 12B is a view of another embodiment of a luminaire used to provide direct and indirect components of a light intensity distribution. -
FIGS. 13A-H and 13J-13N show different aspects of symmetric and asymmetric luminaires. -
FIGS. 14A-14G show different aspects of a troffer luminaire. -
FIGS. 15A-15D show different arrangements of luminaires. -
FIGS. 16A-16F show different arrangements of asymmetric luminaires. -
FIGS. 17A-17F are views of an embodiment of a task luminaire. -
FIG. 18 is an intensity profile of an embodiment of a task luminaire. -
FIGS. 19A-19C show aspects of an intensity distribution associated with a task luminaire. -
FIGS. 20A-20C show other aspects of the intensity distribution associated with a task luminaire. -
FIGS. 21A and 21B are views of another embodiment of a task luminaire. -
FIG. 22 is an intensity profile associated with the other embodiment of the task luminaire. -
FIGS. 23A-23C show aspects of an intensity distribution associated with the other embodiment of the task luminaire. -
FIGS. 24A-24C show other aspects of an intensity distribution associated with the other embodiment of the task luminaire. -
FIG. 25 is a view of a hollow embodiment of a task luminaire. -
FIG. 26 is an intensity profile of the hollow embodiment of the task luminaire. -
FIGS. 27A-27F show aspects of an intensity distribution associated with the hollow embodiment of the task luminaire. -
FIGS. 28A-B is a view of a hollow embodiment of a luminaire used to provide direct and indirect components of a light intensity distribution. -
FIGS. 28C-D show aspects of secondary optics. -
FIGS. 29A-29C are views of another hollow embodiment of a luminaire used to provide direct and indirect components of a light intensity distribution. -
FIG. 30 is an intensity profile of the other hollow embodiment of a luminaire. -
FIGS. 31A-31C show aspects of an intensity distribution associated with the other hollow embodiment of the luminaire. -
FIGS. 32A-32C show aspects of an intensity distribution associated with the other hollow embodiment of the luminaire. -
FIGS. 33A-33C show aspects of an intensity distribution associated with the other hollow embodiment of the luminaire. -
FIGS. 34A-34C are views of embodiments of LEE strips for a luminaire. -
FIGS. 34D-E are views of an embodiment of a luminaire where LEEs and a light guide are coupled to a phosphor layer without an air gap. -
FIG. 34F is a light emission-pattern of LEE strips. -
FIG. 35 is a view of another embodiment of a LEE strip. -
FIGS. 36A-36H show aspects of optical couplers of a luminaire. -
FIGS. 36J-T show aspects of light guides of a luminaire. -
FIG. 36U shows an optical extractor with multiple optical elements. -
FIG. 37 is a view of an embodiment of an LEE and optical coupler. -
FIGS. 38A-38B are views of an embodiment of a luminaire with rotational symmetry. -
FIG. 39 is a view of another embodiment of a luminaire with rotational symmetry. -
FIG. 40 is a view of yet another embodiment of a luminaire with rotational symmetry. -
FIGS. 41-42 are views of an embodiment of a luminaire system. -
FIG. 43 is a view of example components for forming LEE strips for a luminaire. -
FIG. 44A is a view of an embodiment of a light guide and optical extractor for a luminaire. -
FIG. 44B shows an example of a modular luminaire. -
FIG. 44C shows an example of an integrally formed luminaire. -
FIGS. 45A-45B are views of a hollow embodiment of a luminaire with rotational symmetry. -
FIGS. 46A-46B and 47 show components of the hollow embodiment of a luminaire with rotational symmetry. -
FIG. 48 is an intensity profile of the luminaire of the hollow embodiment of a luminaire with rotational symmetry. -
FIGS. 49A-49C show aspects of an intensity distribution associated with the hollow embodiment of a luminaire with rotational symmetry. - Like elements in different figures are identified with the same reference numeral.
- Referring to
FIG. 1 , in which a Cartesian coordinate system is shown for reference, aluminaire 100 for illuminating a target surface can include at least asubstrate 110, one ormore LEEs 112 disposed on thesubstrate 110, one or moreoptical couplers 120, an optionallight guide 130, and anoptical extractor 140. TheLEEs 112 emit light during operation in a firstangular range 115 with respect to a normal to the substrate 110 (e.g., the direction of the z-axis). For example, a divergence of the firstangular range 115 of the light emitted by theLEEs 112 can be 150-180 degrees around optical axes of theLEEs 112 or, if theLEEs 112 andsubstrate 110 are so aligned, a surface normal defined by thesubstrate 110.Optical couplers 120 receive light fromLEEs 112. Eachoptical coupler 120 is configured to redirect the light received into a light with a secondangular range 125 and redirect it into afirst end 131 oflight guide 130. For example, a divergence of the secondangular range 125 of the light provided by theoptical couplers 120 can be 90 degrees around the normal (+/−45 degrees). When thelight guide 130 is not part of theluminaire 100, theoptical couplers 120 redirect the light with the secondangular range 125 towards theoptical extractor 140. Thelight guide 130 can guide the light to adistal end 132 of thelight guide 130 away fromLEEs 112. Thelight guide 130 provides the guided light at thedistal end 132 in anangular range 135. In some implementations, thelight guide 130 can be shaped to guide the light received from theoptical couplers 120 and to provide the guided light in substantially the same angular range (e.g, 135≈125) at the output end of thelight guide 132.Optical extractor 140 receives light with that exitsend 132 of thelight guide 130 or, when thelight guide 130 is not part of theluminaire 100, theoptical extractor 140 receives the light provided by theoptical couplers 120. In some embodiments, the surface of theoptical couplers 120 can be continuous or have facets. -
Optical extractor 140 includes a reflective interface that reflects the light, which exits luminaire 100 (indicated by arrows) with output angular ranges 142, 142′. As discussed in detail below, the output angular ranges 142, 142′ at which light exitsluminaire 100 depend, among other things, on the properties of optical extractor 140 (e.g., geometry of the optical interfaces and optical properties of the materials forming the extractor). These and other properties of theluminaire 100 can be tailored to provide extraction profiles desirable for specific lighting applications. - In some embodiments,
luminaire 100 can include one or more optional tertiary optics (or also referred to as secondary reflectors) 150, 150′, positioned to receive at least some light output by theoptical extractor 140. Thetertiary optics optical extractor 140 intoangular ranges - In general, the components of
luminaire 100 are arranged to redirect light emitted fromLEEs 112 away from the LEEs before the light is emitted into the ambient environment. The spatial separation of the place of generation of the light, also referred to as the physical (light) source, from the place of extraction of the light, also referred to as the virtual light source or virtual filament, can facilitate design of the luminaire. For example, in some embodiments, the virtual light source/filament can be configured to provide substantially non-isotropic light emission with respect to planes parallel to an optical axis of the luminaire. In contrast, a typical incandescent filament generally emits substantially isotropically distributed amounts of light. The virtual light source as embodied inluminaire 100 may be viewed as one or more portions of space from which substantial amounts of light appear to emanate. Furthermore, separating the LEEs, with their predetermined optical, thermal, electrical and mechanical constraints, from the place of light extraction, may facilitate a greater degree of design freedom of the optical system of the luminaire and allows for an extended optical path, which can permit a predetermined level of light mixing before light is emitted from the luminaire. Thus,luminaire 100 may be configured to provide predetermined illumination with good aesthetics that may be useful for a wide range of lighting applications. - In general,
luminaire 100 is configured to generate light of a desired chromaticity. In many applications,luminaire 100 is configured to provide broadband light. Broadband light can be generated using nominally white or off-white LEEs or colored LEEs whose emissions are mixed to provide white light. Alternatively, or additionally, white light can be generated using an LEE configured to emit pump light (e.g., blue, violet or ultra-violet light) in conjunction with a wavelength conversion material. For example, in certain embodiments,LEEs 112 include GaN-based pump LEDs with an overlying phosphor layer (e.g., YAG) that creates yellow, red and/or green components to produce white light. - In some embodiments,
luminaire 100 may be configured to provide colored light (e.g., yellow, red, green, blue light). Different LEEs inluminaire 100 can be configured to emit nominally different light under operating conditions, for example yellow, red, green, blue, white or other color light. - In general, relatively energy efficient LEEs can be used. For example,
LEEs 112 can have an output efficiency of about 50 lm/W or more (e.g., about 75 lm/W or more, about 100 lm/W, about 125 lm/W or more, about 150 lm/W or more). In certain embodiments,LEEs 112 conduct current greater than about 350 mA (e.g., 400 mA or more, 450 mA or more, 500 mA or more). LEEs may be surface mount devices. - The number of LEEs in a luminaire can vary. In some embodiments,
luminaire 100 can include relatively few LEEs (e.g., 10 or fewer). In some cases,luminaire 100 can include a large number of LEEs (e.g., 100 or more). In many applications, however,luminaire 100 includes between 4 and 100 LEEs. - In some embodiments, the LEEs can be fixed or spatially tunable via electronic means. For example, the LEEs can be arranged such that a direction of light emitted by the LEEs can be controlled by selective control of the amount of light provided by each LEE (e.g., spatial tuning). In addition, the LEEs can include multiple spectral sources and/or arrangements of light converting materials to achieve tunable spatial and chromatic variations. Some, or all, of the source LEEs can be configured to provide light in multiple first angular ranges to create spatially tunable properties even in the far field light output of the luminaire. Because the angular range can be preserved through the system, multiple first angular ranges can be created such that the far field distributions (e.g., angular ranges of light output) can be modulated electronically by selective activation of corresponding LEEs. Through modulating the far field distributions, a chromaticity can be distributed through a wider range of angles than another chromaticity in the far field, for example. Thus, chromaticity can be modulated in the far field independent of luminance.
- Each of the
optical couplers 120 is configured to receive light from one or more of the LEEs that are suitably disposed at an entrance aperture of the optical coupler. In embodiments that feature multiple optical couplers, they may be integrally formed. Each optical coupler can be configured to provide a predetermined amount of light at an exit aperture of the optical coupler. For this purpose, each optical coupler is optically coupled with the corresponding LEEs and the light guide. Adjacent optical couplers may be optically isolated or optically coupled to control cross talk and/or collimation of light or other functions in one or more planes parallel to the optical axes of the optical couplers or in other directions. - The optical couplers are configured to allow coupling of a predetermined amount of light from one or more of the LEEs into the optical couplers and a predetermined amount of that light is provided at the exit apertures of the optical couplers. Each optical coupler is configured to transform light as it interacts with the optical coupler between the entrance aperture and the exit aperture. Such transformations, also referred to as conditioning, may be regarded as transformations of the phase space of light including collimation of light (e.g. causing a reduction of the divergence of the coupled light) or other transformations, and/or preservation of etendue, light flux and/or other parameters, for example. In some embodiments, the optical couplers are configured to provide light with predetermined properties to control light losses in other components of the luminaire, including one or more of the
light guide 130,extractor 140,tertiary optics light guide 130 to theoptical extractor 140, has less than a predetermined divergence, is injected into the light guide at suitable angles relative to the optical interfaces of thelight guide 130 or has other properties. - Optical couplers can include one or more optical elements including non-imaging dielectric TIR concentrators, such as CPC (compound parabolic concentrators), CECs (compound elliptical concentrators), CHC (compound hyperbolic concentrators), tapered or untapered portions, light pipes, segmented concentrators, other geometry concentrators, one or more lenses or other optical elements, for example. In some embodiments, optical couplers and LEEs are integrally formed as a single component.
- A luminaire may include a number of optical couplers with the same or different configuration. Optical couplers may have equal or different profiles or cross sections in different directions. In some embodiments, optical couplers may have varying configurations depending on their location within a cluster or group of optical couplers. For example, optical couplers proximate the ends of an elongate luminaire may be configured with properties different from those of optical couplers near the center of the luminaire. Like considerations may apply in embodiments in which the optical couplers are disposed in clusters proximate an optical axis. For example, optical couplers proximate the periphery of a cluster may be configured with properties different from those proximate the optical axis. An optical coupler may have rotationally symmetric and/or asymmetric cross sections, for example it may have parabolic, elliptical, circular, hyperbolic, triangular, square, rectangular, hexagonal or other regular or irregular polygonal or other cross sections.
- A portion or all of the
optical coupler 120 may be made of a solid transparent body configured to propagate light internally and solely, partially or not at all, depending on whether a specular reflective coating is employed on the outside of the solid transparent body, rely on TIR, or may be configured to provide a through hole that is partially or fully reflectively coated on one or more optical surfaces. Like consideration may apply to thelight guide 130, theoptical extractors 140 or other components of the luminaire, for example. Depending on the embodiment, one or moreoptical couplers 120 may be configured as hollow, reflectively coated non-imaging optical couplers. One or more of theoptical couplers 120 may include a dielectric collimating optic configured to provide a predetermined collimation angle. The collimation angle may be determined by the length and/or shape of respective surfaces of theoptical coupler 120, for example. Anoptical coupler 120 may be configured to provide substantially equal collimation about an optical axis in rotationally symmetrical configurations or may provide different collimation in different directions with respect to an optical plane of theoptical coupler 120 and/or other component of the luminaire, for example. - In general,
light guide 130 can have a generally regular or irregular prismatic, cylindrical, cuboid or other shape and include one or more light guide elements. Light-guide elements may be arranged in a line or a cluster that may or may not allow light to transmit between light-guide elements. Light-guide elements may be arranged in parallel with one light-guide element for each coupler. Such configurations may be integrally formed. Multiple light-guide elements may be arranged in a cluster, the light-guide elements of the cluster coupling light into one ormore extractors 140. Multiple light-guide elements may be disposed abutting one another or placed apart at predetermined distances. Thelight guide 130 and/or one or more light-guide elements may be integrally formed, modularly configured, arranged and/or durably disposed via a suitably configured interconnect system during manufacture, installation, servicing or other event. - The
light guide 130 and/or one or more light-guide elements may be configured to have one or more substantially reflective surfaces defining one or more mantles that extend from afirst end 131 to asecond end 132 of thelight guide 130 for enclosing and enabling optical confinement proximate an optical axis or optical plane along which thelight guide 130 can guide light with below predetermined light losses. One or more surfaces of the mantle may be substantially parallel, tapered or otherwise arranged. Such surfaces may be substantially flat or curved. Generally, thelight guide 130 can have elongate or non-elongate cross section with respect to an axes or planes of the luminaire. Non-elongate light-guides may be rotationally or otherwise symmetric about an optical axis. - The
light guide 130 is configured to guide light from the one or moreoptical couplers 120 via its optical surfaces, by total internal reflection (TIR) and/or specular reflection. Mixing of the light in the light-guide elements may be achieved in part by the shape of the optical surfaces. The light guide may be configured to intermix light fromdifferent LEEs 112. In some embodiments, thelight guide 130 is configured to mix light and to provide light with a predetermined uniformity in color and/or illuminance to theoptical extractor 140. - In some embodiments, the
light guide 130 has a hollow configuration having reflective optical surfaces on its inside that transmit light along the length of the hollow with predetermined light-loss properties. The reflectivity of the reflective optical surfaces may originate from or be enhanced by reflective coatings, films, layers or other reflective aids. The composition of and manner in which such reflective coatings may be disposed and/or manufactured would be readily known by a person skilled in the art. -
Optical extractor 140 is disposed at an end of thelight guide 132 opposite theoptical coupler 120 and includes one or more reflective interfaces that are configured to redirect light from thelight guide 130 outward away from the optical axis of thelight guide 130 towards and through one or more light-exit surfaces of theoptical extractor 140 into the ambient. Depending on the embodiment, the directions of propagation of the emitted light may be parallel, antiparallel and/or oblique, that is backward and/or forward, with respect to the optical axis of thelight guide 130. For example, different portions of light emitted from theoptical extractor 140 may propagate upwards towards a ceiling or downwards towards the surface of a table, for example, depending on the configuration, orientation and/or application of theluminaire 100. The intensity distribution is determined at least in part by the configuration of theoptical extractor 140 and/or the configuration of other components of the luminaire including theoptical couplers 120, or other components, for example. - The
optical extractor 140 may be configured to emit one or more beams of light with predetermined intensity distributions (i.e., into specific ranges of solid angles). For example, different intensity distributions may be provided via different light-exit surfaces, for example on either side of an elongateoptical extractor 140. Theoptical extractor 140 and/or one or more portions thereof from which light appears to emanate under operating conditions may be referred to as a virtual light source. Depending on the embodiments, the virtual light source can have an elongate or non-elongate configuration. The one or more beams may be symmetric or asymmetric with respect to theluminaire 100. A non-elongate configuration may have rotational symmetry about an optical axis. The intensity distributions or one or more portions thereof may be configured to limit glare by limiting direct downward lighting to predetermined levels, for example. - In some embodiments, the intensity distribution of the
optical extractor 140, at least in part, may be determined by the configuration and disposition of the reflective interfaces relative to the light-exit surfaces of theoptical extractor 140. Theoptical extractor 140 may include one or more reflective interfaces having one or more flat or curved shapes including parabolic, hyperbolic, circular, elliptical or other shapes. In certain embodiments, theoptical extractor 140 includes one or more reflective coatings to redirect light and provide a desired emission pattern. The reflective interface may have a linear, convex, concave, hyperbolic, linear segmented or other cross section shaped as a plurality of potentially disjoint, piecewise differentiable curves, in order to achieve a predetermined emission pattern. In general, theoptical extractor 140 may provide symmetrical or asymmetrical beam distributions with respect to an optical axis or optical plane thereof. In elongate embodiments of anoptical extractor 140, the cross sections of reflective interfaces and/or light-exit surfaces may change along an elongate extension thereof. Such variations may be stepwise or continuous. For instance, the reflective interface of theoptical extractor 140 may have a first cross section shaped as a plurality of potentially disjoint, piecewise differentiable first curves, and a second cross section at a different location along the elongate extension of the reflective interface, such that the second cross section is shaped as a different plurality of potentially disjoint, piecewise differentiable second curves. - In certain embodiments, the reflective optical interfaces may have a symmetrical or asymmetrical v-shaped or other cross section. A v-shaped cross section may also be referred to as a v-groove in elongate embodiments or a conical cavity in non-elongate embodiments. As used herein, the term “v-groove” refers to the v-shaped cross-section through the reflective optical interfaces, but does not require that the optical extractor include an actual groove. For example, in some embodiments, the optical extractor includes two portions of solid material that meet at a v-shaped interface. Such an interface is also referred to as a v-groove, even though the optical extractor does not include groove. Depending on the embodiment, a v-groove may have substantially equal cross section along a length of the optical extractor or it may vary depending on the position along the elongate extension. The apex formed by such v-shaped reflective interfaces may be generally directed towards the light guide. In addition, the sides forming the v-groove may have linear cross-sections, or may be non-linear (e.g., curved or faceted). Moreover, the apex of the reflective optical interfaces can be a rounded vertex with a non-zero radius of curvature.
- Generally, the
optical extractor 140 can be integrally or modularly formed with thelight guide 130. The optical extractor may be formed of one or more materials equal, similar or dissimilar to that of the light guide and include one or more different materials. Depending on the embodiment, theoptical extractor 140 may be configured to redirect light via TIR, specular and/or diffuse reflection, for example, via a dielectric or metallic mirror surface, refraction and/or otherwise. Theoptical extractor 140 may include one or more coatings including one or more films of suitable dielectric, metallic, wavelength conversion material or other material. Depending on the embodiment, a modularly formed optical extractor and light guide may include or be interconnected with suitable connectors for durable interconnection and optional registration during manufacture, assembly, service or other event. Different modular optical extractors may have different configurations to provide different lighting properties. To improve optical and/or mechanical performance, a coupling between theoptical extractor 140 and thelight guide 130 may be established by employing one or more suitably transparent compounds with predetermined refractive indices. Such compounds may include at least initially fluid substances such as silicone or other curable or non-curable substances. Such substances may provide an adhesive function. - Each of the light-exit surfaces and/or the reflective interfaces of the
optical extractor 140 may include one or more segments, each having a predetermined shape including convex, concave, planar or other shape. Shapes of the light-exit surface and/or the reflective interfaces can be determined to provide predetermined levels of light extraction via the optical extractor and to limit light losses due to back reflection and/or absorption of light within the optical extractor. - In some embodiments, provisions to protect one or more surfaces of the
light guide 130 and/or theoptical extractor 140 from the generation of surface defects that can be caused by external influences, for example, dust, dirt, fingerprints, scratches, and so forth can be provided. For example, surfaces that are used to redirect light via TIR or that interface with specular reflective coatings may be coated with a lipid-repelling/oleophobic, scratch resistant, or antistatic coating or dust protective layer. Furthermore, a sleeve can be added to one or more surfaces of thelight guide 130 and/or theoptical extractor 140. A protective sleeve can have a white diffusive reflective surface arranged to face thelight guide 130. A white diffuse reflective surface can increase chances of reentry of light back into the light guide. In some embodiments, one or more surfaces of thelight guide 130 and/or theoptical extractor 140 can be roughened or provided with a suitable surface texture to mitigate effects from external influences or surface defects. - In some embodiments, the optional
tertiary optics tertiary optic 150 can have an elongate or non-elongate configuration. The optionaltertiary optic 150 can be considered as a modular component of theluminaire 100 that can be used to facilitate selection of a variety of intensity distributions and therefore generation of lighting conditions, for example, during installation of theluminaire 100. - In some embodiments, the optional
tertiary optic 150 may be disposed and configured to substantially extend the full length, L, of thelight guide 130 and surround at least portions of the width, which is along the optical path, of thelight guide 130. Depending on the embodiment, the optionaltertiary optic 150 can include one or more specular or diffusely reflecting surfaces provided by a sheet of metal, such as aluminum or other metal, or reflective plastic, paint or other coating, for example. - The optional
tertiary optic 150 can include partially or wholly transparent portions, as a whole be partially transparent in addition to being reflective, or include openings that are suitably shaped to enable light to pass and achieve a predetermined lighting effect, for example. Depending on the embodiment, the optionaltertiary optic 150 and/or openings in the optionaltertiary optic 150 may be configured to provide an illumination effect, support heat dissipation or achieve both illumination and heat dissipation effects. Openings may be configured to facilitate airflow and thereby support convective cooling of the luminaire. - The shape of the optional
tertiary optic 150, such as the angle with respect to the target surface, its curvature, and the width of the reflector, can be adapted to generate a predetermined emission pattern for general illumination or particular illumination applications. The optionaltertiary optic 150 can include multiple reflective surfaces. - The optional
tertiary optic 150 may be angularly and/or vertically adjustable to allow calibration and assist in achieving a desired intensity distribution. For this purpose, aluminaire 100 may include one or more hinge or locking mechanisms and/or interconnectors. Corresponding luminaires may provide predetermined functionality and/or modularity to adjustably accommodate different lighting requirements of different sized rooms including hallway, closed and open plan offices, or other spaces, for example. - The optional
tertiary optic 150 may include an areal light source, for example a light-emitting sheet based on a plurality of discrete light sources or organic light emitting diode material. The areal light source may be arranged to emit light on one side and reflect light on an opposite side. The reflective side may be arranged to manipulate light as described herein and the light-emitting side may be configured to provide auxiliary illumination. Depending on the embodiment, theluminaire 100 may be configured to provide independent control of the areal light source and theLEEs 112 that are coupled with theoptical couplers 120. - Referring to
FIG. 2A , in which a Cartesian coordinate system is shown for reference, an embodiment of aluminaire module 200 includes asubstrate 210 having a plurality ofLEEs 212 distributed along thesubstrate 210. TheLEEs 212 are disposed at anupper edge 231 of alight guide 230. As shorthand, the positive z-direction is referred to herein as the “forward” direction and the negative z-direction is the “backward” direction. Sections through the luminaire parallel to the x-z plane are referred to as the “cross-section” or “cross-sectional plane” of the luminaire module. Also,luminaire module 200 extends along the y-direction, so this direction is referred to as the “longitudinal” direction of the luminaire module. Lastly, embodiments of luminaire modules can have a plane of symmetry parallel to the y-z plane. Depending on the embodiment, one or more components of the luminaire module can be invariant or variant under translation along the y-axis. This is referred to as the “symmetry plane” of the luminaire module. -
Multiple LEEs 212 are disposed on thesubstrate 210, although only one of themultiple LEEs 212 is shown inFIG. 2A . For example, the plurality ofLEEs 212 can include multiple white LEDs. Anoptical extractor 240 is disposed at lower edge oflight guide 232. TheLEEs 212 are coupled with one or more optical couplers 220 (only one of which is shown inFIG. 2A ). -
Substrate 210,light guide 230, andoptical extractor 240 extend a length L along the y-direction. Generally, L can vary as desired. Typically, L is in a range from about 1 cm to about 200 cm (e.g., 20 cm or more, 30 cm or more, 40 cm or more, 50 cm or more, 60 cm or more, 70 cm or more, 80 cm or more, 100 cm or more, 125 cm or more, 150 cm or more). - The number of
LEEs 212 on thesubstrate 210 will generally depend, inter alfa, on the length L, where more LEEs are used for longer luminaires. In some embodiments, the plurality ofLEEs 212 can include between 10 and 1,000 LEEs (e.g., about 50 LEEs, about 100 LEEs, about 200 LEEs, about 500 LEEs). Generally, the density of luminaires (e.g., number of LEEs per unit length) will also depend on the nominal power of the LEEs and illuminance desired from the luminaire module. For example, a relatively high density of LEEs can be used in applications where high illuminance is desired or where low power LEEs are used. In some embodiments, theluminaire module 200 has an LEE density along its length of 0.1 LEE per centimeter or more (e.g., 0.2 per centimeter or more, 0.5 per centimeter or more, 1 per centimeter or more, 2 per centimeter or more). In embodiments, LEEs can be evenly spaced along the length, L, of the luminaire. In some implementations, a heat-sink 205 can be attached to thesubstrate 210 to extract heat emitted by the plurality ofLEEs 212. The heat-sink 205 can be disposed on a surface of thesubstrate 210 opposing the side of thesubstrate 210 on which theLEEs 212 are disposed. -
Optical coupler 220 includes one or more solid pieces of transparent material (e.g., glass or a transparent organic plastic, such as polycarbonate or acrylic) havingsurfaces LEEs 212 towardslight guide 230. In general, surfaces 221 and 222 are shaped to collect and collimate light emitted from the LEEs. In the x-z cross-sectional plane, surfaces 221 and 222 can be straight or curved. Examples of curved surfaces include surfaces having a constant radius of curvature, parabolic or hyperbolic shapes. In some embodiments, surfaces 221 and 222 are coated with a highly reflective material (e.g., a reflective metal, such as aluminum), to provide a highly reflective optical interface. The cross-sectional profile ofoptical coupler 220 can be uniform along the length L ofluminaire module 200. Alternatively, the cross-sectional profile can vary. For example, surfaces 221 and/or 222 can be curved out of the x-z plane. Examples of such optical couplers are discussed below in connection with FIGS.34-36. - The surface of
optical coupler 220 and the adjacent upper edge oflight guide 231 are optically coupled. In other words, the surfaces of the interface are attached using a material that substantially matches the refractive index of the material forming theoptical coupler 220 orlight guide 230 or both. For example,optical coupler 220 can be affixed tolight guide 230 using an index matching fluid, grease, or adhesive. In some embodiments,optical coupler 220 is fused tolight guide 230 or they are integrally formed from a single piece of material. -
Light guide 230 is formed from a piece of transparent material (e.g., glass or a transparent organic plastic, such as polycarbonate or acrylic) that can be the same or different from the material formingoptical couplers 220.Light guide 230 extends length L in the y-direction, has a thickness uniform T in the x-direction, and a uniform depth D in the z-direction. The dimensions D and T are generally selected based on the desired optical properties of the light guide. During operation, light coupled into the light guide from optical coupler 220 (depicted by rays 252) reflects off the planar surfaces of the light guide by TIR and mixes within the light guide. The mixing can help achieve illuminance and/or color uniformity at the distal portion of thelight guide 232 atoptical extractor 240. The depth, D, oflight guide 230 can be selected to achieve adequate uniformity at the exit aperture (i.e., at end 232) of the light guide. In some embodiments, D is in a range from about 1 cm to about 20 cm (e.g., 2 cm or more, 4 cm or more, 6 cm or more, 8 cm or more, 10 cm or more, 12 cm or more). - In general,
optical couplers 220 are designed to restrict the angular range of light entering the light guide 230 (e.g., to within +/−40 degrees) so that at least a substantial amount of the light is coupled into spatial modes in thelight guide 230 that undergoes TIR at the planar surfaces.Light guide 230 has a uniform thickness T, which is the distance separating two planar opposing surfaces of the light guide. Generally, T is sufficiently large so the light guide has an aperture atupper surface 231 sufficiently large to approximately match (or exceed) the aperture ofoptical coupler 220. In some embodiments, T is in a range from about 0.05 cm to about 2 cm (e.g., about 0.1 cm or more, about 0.2 cm or more, about 0.5 cm or more, about 0.8 cm or more, about 1 cm or more, about 1.5 cm or more). Depending on the embodiment, the narrower the light guide the better it may mix light. A narrow light guide also provides a narrow exit aperture. As such light emitted from the light guide can be considered to resemble the light emitted from a one-dimensional linear light source, also referred to as an elongate virtual filament. - As discussed previously, length L corresponds to the length of the luminaire and can vary as desired.
- While
optical coupler 220 andlight guide 230 are formed from solid pieces of transparent material, hollow structures are also possible. For example, theoptical coupler 220 or thelight guide 230 or both may be hollow with reflective inner surfaces rather than being solid. As such material cost can be reduced and absorption in the light guide avoided. A number of specular reflective materials may be suitable for this purpose including materials such as 3M Vikuiti™ or Miro IV™ sheet from Alanod Corporation where greater than 90% of the incident light would be efficiently guided to the optical extractor.Optical extractor 240 is also composed of a solid piece of transparent material (e.g., glass or a transparent organic plastic, such as polycarbonate or acrylic) that can be the same as or different from the material forminglight guide 230. In the example implementation shown inFIG. 2A , the piece of dielectric material includesflat surfaces curved surfaces flat surfaces surface 243, while thecurved surfaces luminaire module 200. -
Flat surfaces input end 232′ of theoptical extractor 240 fromlight guide 230. In the x-z cross-sectional plane, the lines corresponding tosurfaces vertex 241. In general, the included angle of the v-shape can vary as desired. For example, in some embodiments, the included angle can be relatively small (e.g., from 30° to 60°). In certain embodiments, the included angle is in a range from 60° to 120° (e.g., about 90°). The included angle can also be relatively large (e.g., in a range from 120° to 150° or more). In the example implementation shown inFIG. 2A , the output surfaces 246 and 248 of theoptical extractor 240 are curved with a constant radius of curvature that is the same for both. Accordingly,luminaire module 200 has a plane ofsymmetry intersecting vertex 241 parallel to the y-z plane. - The surface of
optical extractor 240 adjacent to thelower edge 232 oflight guide 230 is optically coupled toedge 232. For example,optical extractor 240 can be affixed tolight guide 230 using an index matching fluid, grease, or adhesive. In some embodiments,optical extractor 240 is fused tolight guide 230 or they are integrally formed from a single piece of material. - During operation, light exiting
light guide 230 throughend 232 impinges on the reflective interfaces at portions of the redirectingsurface output surfaces surface 242 provides light having anangular distribution 138 towards theoutput surface 246, the second portion of the redirectingsurface 244 provides light having anangular distribution 138′ towards theoutput surface 246. The light exits optical extractor throughoutput surfaces optical extractor 240 inangular ranges optical extractor 240 may be configured to emit light upwards (i.e., towards the plane intersecting the LEEs and parallel to the x-y plane), downwards (i.e., away from that plane) or both upwards and downwards. In general, the direction of light exiting the luminaire throughsurfaces light guide 230 and the orientation ofsurfaces -
Surfaces light guide 230 is output byoptical extractor 240 in directions that are within a certain angle of the forward direction (i.e., in certain angular ranges relative to the positive z-direction). In embodiments where theluminaire module 200 is attached to a ceiling so that the forward direction is towards the floor, such configurations can help avoid glare and an appearance of non-uniform illuminance. - In general, the intensity distribution provided by
luminaire module 200 reflects the symmetry of the luminaire's structure about the y-z plane. For example, referring toFIG. 3 , anexemplary intensity distribution 59 includessymmetric lobes 59′ and 59″ with peak intensity at approximately 135° and 225°, respectively, corresponding to the light provided by theluminaire module 200.FIG. 3 shows a plot where 0° corresponds to the forward z-direction of the Cartesian coordinate system shown inFIG. 2A , 180° corresponds to the negative z-direction, and 90° and 270° correspond to the positive and negative x-directions, respectively. The intensity distribution output byluminaire module 200 in lux is given by the radius of the plot in a particular direction. In addition,FIG. 3 depicts anangular range 58 that corresponds to theangular range 142′ of the light output by theluminaire module 200 through theoutput surface 248. The light havingangular range 58 propagates along a prevalent direction 56 (given by the maximum intensity of thelobe 59′ of theintensity distribution 59 associated with the light provided by theluminaire module 200.) Also, the light withangular range 58 has a divergence 57 (given by the width of thelobe 59′ of theintensity distribution 59 associated with the light provided by theluminaire module 200.) - In the example shown in
FIG. 3 ,luminaire module 200 provides no illumination in the range from 90° to 270°. All the illumination is directed into afirst lobe 59″ between 112.5° and 157.5° and asecond lobe 59′ between 202.5° and 247.5°. - In general, the intensity profile of
luminaire module 200 will depend on the configuration of theoptical coupler 220, thelight guide 230 and theoptical extractor 240. For instance, the interplay between the shape of theoptical coupler 220, the shape of the redirectingsurface 243 of theoptical extractor 240 and the shapes of the output surfaces 246, 248 of theoptical extractor 240 can be used to control the angular width and prevalent direction (orientation) of the lobes in theintensity profile 59. - In some implementations, the orientation of the
lobes 59′, 59″ can be adjusted based on the included angle of the v-shapedgroove 241 formed by the portions of the redirectingsurface intensity distribution 59 withlobes 59′, 59″ located at relatively smaller angles compared tolobes 59′, 59″ of theintensity distribution 59 that results for a second included angle larger than the first angle. In this manner, light can be extracted from theluminaire module 200 in a more forward direction for the smaller of two included angles formed by the portions of the redirectingsurface - Furthermore, while
surfaces surfaces input end 232′ of theoptical extractor 240, concavereflective surfaces FIG. 3 ), while convexreflective surfaces optical extractor 240. As such, suitably configured redirectingsurfaces -
FIGS. 2B and 2D show that for a cross-sectional plane perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension (or also referred to as longitudinal extension) of theluminaire module 200, the redirectingsurface 243 can have an apex 241 that separates the first and second portions of the redirectingsurface FIGS. 2B and 2D , the first and second portions of the redirectingsurface luminaire module 200. For example, the first and second portions of the redirectingsurface surface input end 232′ of theextractor 240 to the redirecting surface 243), can be both positive (e.g., concave with respect to the propagation direction), or one can be positive (convex) and the other one can be negative (concave). -
FIG. 2E shows that, for a cross-sectional plane perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension of theluminaire module 200, the redirectingsurface 243 can be shaped as an arc of a circle, ellipse, parabola or other curve. In this case, the first and second portions of the redirectingsurface FIG. 2E , a curvature of the redirectingsurface 243 is negative (e.g., convex with respect to a direction of propagation of light from theinput end 232′ of theextractor 240 to the redirecting surface 243). -
FIG. 2C shows that, for a cross-sectional plane perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension of theluminaire module 200, either of the first and second portions of the redirectingsurface surface surface 242 can have an apex 2411 that separates the first portion of the redirectingsurface 242 in at least two regions thereof. The regions of the first portion of the redirectingsurface 242 separated by the apex 2411 can have linear or arcuate shapes. The two regions of the first portion of the redirectingsurface 242 can reflect the light received from theinput end 232′ of theextractor 240 in two different angular sub-ranges, different from each other. In this manner, light provided by the first portion of the redirectingsurface 242 be output at theoutput surface 246 as to intensity lobes that can be manipulated differently, e.g., to illuminate different targets. Such application is described below in this specification in connection withFIG. 12A . As another example, the second portion of the redirectingsurface 244 can have an apex 2444 that separates the second portion of the redirectingsurface 244 in at least two regions thereof. -
FIG. 2F shows that, in some implementations, the first and second portions of the redirectingsurface slot 245, in general a suitably formed aperture.FIG. 2G shows that, in some implementations, either the first and second portions of the redirectingsurface more slots 2455′, 2455″. Each of theslots luminaire module 200. Such a slot can represent an opening in a coating providing a reflecting layer of the redirectingsurface 243, and is configured to allow a portion of light received from theinput end 232′ of theextractor 240 to transmit through theslot 245 of the redirectingsurface 243.FIG. 2F shows that, for a cross-sectional plane perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension of theluminaire module 200 which intersects theslot 245, first and second curves corresponding to the first and second portions of the redirectingsurface FIG. 2G shows that, for a cross-sectional plane perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension theluminaire module 200 which intersects theslots 2455′, 2455″, first and second curves corresponding to the first and second portions of the redirecting surface [242, 244] include one or more discontinuities associated with theslots 2455′, 2455″. - In addition, the curves corresponding to each of the cross-sectional planes illustrated in
FIGS. 2B-2G can have different shapes and different discontinuities in other cross-sectional planes along the longitudinal dimension of theluminaire module 200. In general, different cross-sections of a redirectingsurface 243 can have different combinations of disjoint or joined piecewise differentiable curves. - Moreover, the shape of
output surfaces optical extractor 240 can vary too, and thus, thesurfaces FIGS. 2B-2G regarding contours of the redirecting surface of theextractor 243 in cross-sectional planes perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension of theluminaire module 200 can apply to contours of the output surfaces 246, 248 of theextractor 240 in such cross-sectional planes. - In general, the geometry of the elements can be established using a variety of methods. For example, the geometry can be established empirically. Alternatively, or additionally, the geometry can be established using optical simulation software, such as Lighttools™, Tracepro™, FRED™ or Zemax™, for example.
-
FIG. 2H shows an example of a luminaire module that includes anoptical coupler 220 and alight guide 230. In this example, the luminaire module is elongated along the y-axis. An elongation along the y-axis can be accomplished in straight or curved fashion. In some embodiments, a luminaire module can be configured to match a desired aspect ratio (e.g., about 1, about 2, about 3, about 4, about 5, about 10 or more than 10) between the length and height of the light guide. The aspect ratio can be defined by the length L over the height h as shown inFIG. 2H . In some embodiments the aspect ratio may be determined based on whether a desired distinction between different first angular ranges needs to be preserved along the optical path. - In some embodiments, the
optical coupler 220 and thelight guide 230 can be a hollow or solid component, or combination(s) thereof, to create a desired illumination pattern.FIG. 2J shows an example of a luminaire module with a hollowoptical coupler 220 and a solidlight guide 230. In this example, the luminaire module is elongated along the y-axis, perpendicular to the page. The luminaire module can include an optional anti-reflection layer 260 (e.g., an anti-reflection coating), as known in the art, between theoptical coupler 220 and thelight guide 230. The anti-reflection layer can be coupled with thelight guide 230, for example, an anti-reflection coating can be applied to a surface of thelight guide 230 that interfaces with theoptical coupler 220. -
FIG. 2K shows an example of a luminaire module with a solidoptical coupler 220, a hollowlight guide 230 and anoptional anti-reflection layer 265. In this example, the luminaire module is elongated along the y-axis, perpendicular to the page. Theoptional anti-reflection layer 265 can be coupled with the optical coupler, for example, an anti-reflection coating can be applied to a surface of theoptical coupler 220 that interfaces with thelight guide 230. - It is noted that in some embodiments that include a light guide, configurations of optical junctions similar to or as described with reference to
FIGS. 2J-K may also exist at an optical junction between the light guide and the optical extractor, for example, in embodiments with a solid light guide and a hollow optical extractor, or a hollow light guide and a solid optical extractor. - In some embodiments, a luminaire module can include multiple substrates and/or multiple optical couplers.
FIG. 2L shows a side view of a luminaire that includesmultiple substrates LEEs angular range 115 inFIG. 1 ) with respect to a normal to thesubstrates optical couplers LEEs optical coupler angular range 125 inFIG. 1 ). The light with second angular ranges can be directed into alight guide 130 as described with respect toFIG. 1 . The placement of the optical couplers relative to each other can allow for variation of the light properties (e.g., angular ranges) exiting the optical couplers along a longitudinal dimension. In some embodiments, the multiple substrates can be in electrical communication. In some embodiments, LEEs disposed on different substrates are controlled independently. - The
optical couplers FIG. 2N shows an example of a luminaire module that includes multiple optical couplers 120-1, 120-2, 120-3, and 120-4 that are aligned within different planes relative to thelight guide 130. In this example, optical coupler 120-1 is aligned within plane 1, optical coupler 120-2 is aligned withinplane 2, optical coupler 120-3 is aligned withinplane 3, and optical coupler 120-4 is aligned within plane 4. The optical couplers can be coupled to the optionallight guide 130, which can be shaped to correspond to the output ends of the optical couplers. -
FIG. 2O shows a side view (e.g., in a y-z plane) of an example of a luminaire module that includes multiple optical couplers arranged in different planes. The geometry and configuration (e.g., perpendicular, co-planar, or angular displacements) of the optical couplers can be arranged to provide a desired illumination pattern. The optical couplers can be coupled to a light guide (e.g., light guide 130). In this example optical couplers 120-5 and 120-6 are aligned within planes perpendicular to each other and form a rectangular geometry. The optical couplers 120-5 and 120-6 can be coupled tolight guide 130 and, during operation, direct light into thelight guide 230, which can be output through optical extractors 140-5 and 140-6, for example. - In general,
luminaire module 200 can be designed to emit light into different angular ranges from those shown inFIG. 3 . In some embodiments, luminaires can emit light into lobes that have a different divergence or angular width than those shown inFIG. 3 . For example, in general, the lobes can have a width of up to 90° (e.g., 80° or less, 70° or less, 60° or less, 50° or less, 40° or less, 30° or less, 20° or less). In general, the direction in which the lobes are oriented can also differ from the directions shown inFIG. 3 . The “direction” refers to the direction at which a lobe is brightest. InFIG. 3 , for example, the lobes are oriented at approx. 130 degrees and approx. 230 degrees. In general, lobes can be directed more towards the horizontal (e.g., at an angle in the ranges from 90° to 135°, such as at approx. 90°, approx. 100°, approx. 110°, approx. 120°, approx. 130°, and from 225° to 270°, such as at approx. 230°, approx. 240°, approx. 250°, approx. 260°, approx. 270°). - In general, luminaires can include other features useful for tailoring the intensity profile. For example, in some embodiments, luminaires can include an optically diffuse material that scatters light, thereby homogenizing the luminaire' s intensity profile. For example, surfaces 242 and 244 can be roughed or a diffusely reflecting material, rather than a specular reflective material, can be coated on these surfaces. Accordingly, the optical interfaces at
surfaces - In certain embodiments, a light scattering material can be disposed on
surfaces optical extractor 240. Alternatively, or additionally, surfaces 246 and 248 need not be surfaces having a constant radius of curvature. For example, surfaces 246 and 248 can include portions having differing curvature and/or can have structure thereon (e.g., structural features that scatter or diffract light). - In some embodiments,
optical extractor 240 is structured so that a negligible amount of the light propagating within at least one plane (e.g., the x-z cross-sectional plane) that is reflected bysurface exit surface FIG. 4 , a Weierstrass condition is illustrated for a circular structure 300 (i.e., a cross section through a cylinder or sphere) having asurface 310 of radius R and a concentricnotional circle 320 having a radius R/n, where n is the refractive index of the structure. Any light that passes through thenotional circle 320 within the cross-sectional plane that is incident onsurface 310 ofstructure 300 and has an angle of incidence less than the critical angle will exitstructure 300 without experiencing TIR. This is illustrated inFIG. 4 bylight rays ray 321, propagating withinstructure 300 in the plane but not emanating from withinnotional surface 320 can impinge onsurface 310 at the critical angle or greater angles of incidence. - Accordingly, such light may be subject to TIR and won't exit
structure 300. Furthermore, rays of p-polarized light that pass through a notional space circumscribed by an area with a radius of curvature that is smaller than R/(1+n2)(−1/2), which is smaller than R/n, will not be subject to Fresnel reflection atsurface 310 when exitingstructure 300. This condition may be referred to as Brewster geometry. Embodiments may be configured accordingly. - Referring again to
FIG. 2A , in some embodiments, all or part ofsurfaces surfaces surfaces light guide 230 throughend 232 can reside within this surface so that light within the x-z plane reflected fromsurfaces surfaces - As discussed previously, light is emitted from
luminaire module 200 into two symmetric lobes between 270° and 90° degrees (i.e., in backward directions). Referring toFIG. 5 , in some embodiments,luminaire module 200 is suspended from aceiling 510 such that the emitted light strikes the ceiling. For example,luminaire module 200 can be attached toceiling 510 via acable 501 that include an electrical connection connecting the LEEs inluminaire module 200 to the electrical mains of the room in which it is installed. In some embodiments,cable 501 may include multiple wires (e.g., intertwined), such as a wire sufficient strong to support the luminaire's weight, electrical wire, and, in certain embodiments, a data connection. Due to the backwards intensity profile, the ceiling acts to scatter and reflect the light into the ambient space, as depicted byrays - Such illumination is referred to as “indirect” illumination because it does not propagate directly from the luminaire to the target surface. As an indirect pendant fixture, for example, such embodiments can be configured to provide low glare with high efficiency light coupling to the ceiling to create ambient illumination.
- In some implementations, a luminaire module can be a circular or elliptical torus or any other 3D sweep of a planar design, e.g., of
luminaire module 200. - In some embodiments,
luminaire module 200 includes one or more secondary reflectors to further tailor the intensity profile of the luminaire. For example, referring toFIG. 6 ,luminaire module 200 can include curvedsecondary reflectors 610 that attach toluminaire module 200 near the LEEs and extend outward into the path of the light exitingoptical extractor 240. -
Secondary reflectors 610 are shaped to redirect the light from the optical extractor towards to the target surface, as illustrated byrays reflectors 610 can be specular reflecting surfaces or diffusely reflecting surfaces. Furthermore, the shape of the surfaces (in this instance, concave) provides an additional degree of freedom for a designer to tailor the light distribution profile fromluminaire module 200. - In certain embodiments,
secondary reflectors 610 can be partially transmissive. For example,reflectors 610 can include apertures that allow some of the light fromoptical extractor 240 to pass through the reflectors and reflect from ceiling 510 (e.g., ray 616). Alternatively, or additionally,reflectors 610 can be formed from a reflective material that only partially reflects light. For example,reflectors 610 can be formed from a transparent material and a partially reflective coating (e.g., a partially silvered mirror). In this manner,luminaire module 200 can provide both direct illumination (i.e., light that propagates directly from the luminaire to the target surface) and indirect illumination (i.e., light that propagates via the ceiling). - The
substrate 210 on which theLEEs 212 are arranged may be disposed external to thesecondary reflectors 610 so that the secondary reflectors do not obstruct airflow along the back surface ofsubstrate 210 on which theLEEs 212 are disposed.Secondary reflectors 610 may be configured to provide thermal contact withsubstrate 210 to aid in the dissipation of heat generated by the LEEs.Luminaire module 200 may be configured to provide such thermal coupling also for modularly replaceable secondary reflectors.Secondary reflectors 610 may form part of the heat sink for the LEEs. - While
secondary reflectors 610 are depicted as having a constant radius of curvature, in general, the shape of secondary reflectors may vary as desired. For example, surfaces of secondary reflectors can include one or more segments having straight, angled, segmented, curved, involute or other shape in one or two dimensions to provide a predetermined broad or narrow emission pattern. In some embodiments, secondary reflectors have planar reflective surfaces. The shape of the secondary reflectors may be determined by tailoring algorithms to provide a desired optical function, for example. - In
luminaire module 200, the emission spectrum of the luminaire corresponds to the emission spectrum of the LEEs. However, in some embodiments, a wavelength-conversion material may be positioned in the luminaire, for example remote from the LEEs, so that the wavelength spectrum of the luminaire is dependent both on the emission spectrum of the LEEs and the composition of the wavelength-conversion material. In general, a wavelength-conversion material can be placed in a variety of different locations inluminaire module 200. For example, a wavelength-conversion material may be disposed proximate theLEEs 212,adjacent surfaces optical extractor 240, on the exit surfaces 246 and 248 ofoptical extractor 240, placed at a distance from the exit surfaces 246 and 248 and/or at other locations. Referring toFIG. 7 , in some embodiments, alayer 710 of a wavelength-conversion material is disposed in the path of light exiting optical extractor 240 a distance (e.g., a few millimeters to a few centimeters) fromsurfaces secondary reflectors 610, thereby providing softer lighting. Thelayer 710 of wavelength-conversion material may be attached tolight guide 230, held in place via a suitable support structure (not illustrated), disposed within the extractor (also not illustrated) or otherwise arranged, for example. Wavelength-conversion material that is disposed within the extractor may be configured as a shell or other object and disposed within a notional area that is circumscribed by R/n or even smaller R*(1+n2)(−1/2), wherein R is the radius of curvature of the light-exit surfaces (246 and 248 inFIG. 2 ) of the extractor and n is the index of refraction of the portion of the extractor that is opposite of the wavelength-conversion material as viewed from the reflective surfaces (242 and 244 inFIG. 2 ). The support structure may be transparent self-supporting structure. The light-converting material diffuses light as it converts the wavelengths, provides mixing of the light and can help uniformly illuminatesecondary reflectors 610. - Alternatively, or additionally,
secondary reflectors 610 may contain a layer of wavelength-conversion material. This may also provide or contribute soft, diffuse illumination. For example, the secondary reflector includes a layer of phosphor on or below one or more suitably reflective surfaces of the secondary reflector. Alternatively, or additionally, the secondary reflector may include a translucent material with a wavelength-conversion material in close proximity that may be configured to allow transmission of a portion of light through the secondary reflector to a ceiling or into the ambient behind the secondary reflector. As such the secondary reflector may be configured for direct as well as mixed direct and indirect ambient illumination. - In general,
luminaire module 200 can be configured in a variety of form factors. For example, with reference toFIG. 8 , in some embodiments,luminaire module 200 can be integrated into aluminaire 800 designed to be installed in or suspended from a ceiling with ceiling panels. For example,luminaire 800 can have a 2′×2′ or 2′×4′ footprint (i.e., in the x-y plane), corresponding to the size of conventional modules that support fluorescent luminaires.Luminaire 800 includes acarrier 810,light guide 830, anoptical extractor 840, and asecondary reflector 860.Luminaire 800 further includes optical couplers and a plurality of LEEs (not illustrated) housed withincarrier 810.Carrier 810 can be formed of extruded aluminum and may be attached to thesecondary reflectors 860 and thelight guide 830.Secondary reflectors 860 are closed off at two ends bywalls 870 and are configured to reflect all incident light. In other words,luminaire 800 is designed for direct illumination only. InFIG. 8 , one ofwalls 870 is illustrated in cut away to better show a portion oflight guide 830 andoptical extractor 840.Luminaire 800 can be used alone or in multiples to form a suitably sized troffer, for example. In some embodiments,luminaire 800 includes a diffusor plate positioned, for example, to cover theopening 880 of the luminaire and protect the optical system from dust or other environmental effects. - As explained herein, composition and geometry of components of the luminaire can affect the intensity distribution provided by the luminaire. For example, referring to
FIG. 9 , in some embodiments, luminaire modules can be configured to direct substantially all of the light into a range of angles between 315° and 45° in a cross-sectional plane of theluminaire 800, where 0° corresponds to the forward direction. The forward direction corresponds to a normal to thesubstrate 810 and parallel to thelight guide 830, and can be toward the floor for a luminaire mounted on a ceiling. InFIG. 9 , the intensity profile in the cross-sectional plane is given bytrace 910 and the intensity profile in the symmetry plane is given bytrace 920. The intensity profile in the cross-sectional plane has maximum illuminance at about 330° and 30°. The intensity profile in the symmetry plane also includes lobes having maxima at about 330° and 30°, and also includes maxima at about 350° and 10°. Luminaire modules may be configured to direct little or no illumination into certain angular ranges close to the plane of the ceiling to avoid glare. For example, in the present example, the luminaire directs almost no illumination in ranges from 55° to 90° relative to the forward direction. This may be advantageous because illumination propagating from a luminaire at such directions can be perceived as glare in certain applications (e.g., in office lighting), which is undesirable. - The simulated intensity profile in
FIG. 9 , and in other simulations described below, was generated using Lighttools. - Multiple direct-illumination luminaire modules can be installed in a space to provide desired illumination for a target surface. In general, the number, density, and orientation of the modules in the space can vary as desired to provide an overall intensity profile suitable of the target surface. In some embodiments, arrays of similarly oriented modules can be arranged in a ceiling. For example, referring to
FIGS. 10A-C , twenty five 2′×2′ modules are arranged in a 5×5 array in a 40′×50′ space (8′×10′ spacing) with 9′ ceiling height to illuminate a target surface 2.5′ off the floor. Each module has the intensity distribution shown inFIG. 9 .FIG. 10A shows a contour plot of a simulated intensity distribution on the target surface.FIG. 10B shows a simulated intensity profile through the long dimension of the target surface at X=0 mm. The illuminance varies between about 400 lux and about 500 lux across this section.FIG. 10C shows a simulated intensity profile through the short dimension of the target surfaces at Y=0 mm. The illumination drops below 450 lux within about 500 mm from the edges of the target surface in this section, but stays within a range from about 450 lux to about 550 lux across the majority of the section. The intensity profile illustrated inFIGS. 10A-10C may be suitable for office space, for example. - Referring to
FIGS. 11A and 11B , in certain embodiments, a luminaire is configured as a suspendedluminaire 1100, which includes acarrier 1110, alight guide 1130, anoptical extractor 1140, andsecondary reflectors 1160.Carrier 1110 houses the LEEs and the one or more optical couplers (not shown inFIGS. 11A and 11B ). -
Secondary reflectors 1160 includeapertures 1170.Suspended luminaire 1100 is designed to provide both direct and indirect illumination. Indirect illumination results from light fromoptical extractor 1140 that is transmitted throughapertures 1170 and scatters from the ceiling.FIG. 11C shows an exemplary simulated intensity profile in the cross-sectional plane of an embodiment of suspendedluminaire 1100. Here, 0° corresponds to the forward direction. Direct illumination corresponds to the lobes between 315° and 337.5° and between 22.5° and 45°. Indirect illumination corresponds to the lobes between 90° and 112.5° and between 157.5° and 180°. In this embodiment, suspendedluminaire 1100 emits negligible amounts of light into polar angles between 45° and 90°, between 112.5° and 157.5°, and between 180° and 315°. A suspended luminaire may be fabricated in 4 ft or 8 ft lengths and installed in a linear arrangement for example in an office environment. Such luminaires may emit about 1250 lm/linear foot and provide a peak intensity of above 1500 cd in the indirect beam component and 800 cd in the direct beam component. - In some embodiments, the ratio of reflected light and light passing through secondary reflectors can be adjusted.
FIGS. 11D-E show views of an example of a mechanically adjustablesecondary reflector 1180. Thesecondary reflector 1180 includes two reflector elements 1182-1 and 1182-2 that have transparent portions 1184-1 and 1184-2. The reflector elements 1182-1 and 1182-2 are arranged in an abutting (FIG. 11D shows an exploded view) substantially parallel orientation. As shown inFIG. 11D , the reflector elements 1182-1 and 1182-2 can be mechanically adjusted to vary the amount of light transmission and reflection. For example, the relative position of the transparent portions 1184-1 and 1184-2 can be adjusted by changing the lateral position of the reflector elements relative to each other and therefore the amount of light transmission and reflection through the transparent portions can be varied. The transparent portions 1184-1 and 1184-2 can be substantially aligned allowing a maximum amount of light transmission and gradually displaced to reduce the amount of light transmission through the transparent portions 1184-1 and 1184-2. In some embodiments, the transparent portions in the reflector elements can be displaced such that all light is reflected. - In some embodiments, the reflector elements can be coupled to each other (e.g., by a guide) and mechanically displaced by sliding one reflector element, for example by using a tab, relative to the other reflector element, and thus, gradually covering, or uncovering, the transparent portions through which light can pass. In some embodiments, the mechanical displacement of the reflector elements can be achieved and/or controlled by electronic means (e.g., an electric motor and a control unit). In some embodiments, the transparent portions can be openings (e.g., holes of perforations). The openings can have various shapes including slits, circles, or other shapes, which can be arranged in regular or irregular fashions.
- The mechanical displacement of reflector elements with transparent portions allows for adjustability of the secondary reflectors, for example by a user, to control the amount of uplight to downlight. The direction of adjustment can be in a longitudinal dimension or other direction, e.g. along an involute as described in connection with
FIGS. 13A-13N . -
FIG. 11F shows an example of asecondary reflector 1190 includingelectrochromic material 1192. Electrochromic material (e.g., electronically tunable diffusion glass) can reversibly change transparency independent or dependent of color when an electrical charge is applied. Thesecondary reflector 1190 can include sections of electrochromic material, or the entiresecondary reflector 1190 can be made of electrochromic material, to adjust ratios of reflected, and absorbed light and light passing through the secondary reflector. The desired level of reflection, diffusion, transmission, absorption, or other optical properties of the secondary reflector can be configured during manufacture and/or adjusted by a user, or automatically by a controller, by applying an electrical charge to the electrochromic material, for example, through acontrol unit 1194. - Referring to
FIG. 12A , aluminaire 1200 can be configured to provide both direct and indirect illumination on an illumination target. An indirect portion of an intensity distribution output by theluminaire 1200 can includeangular ranges luminaire 1200 is suspended from a ceiling, the indirect portion of an intensity distribution can be designed to achieve maximum illuminance uniformity on the ceiling, for example in a typical spacing arrangement of luminaires of 8′×10′. In order to achieve good illuminance uniformity on the ceiling at very low penetration of theluminaire 1200 into the room, the indirect portions of the intensity distribution need to exit the luminaire at oblique angles, typically with a peak intensity between 90 and 110 degrees with respect to the positive z-direction and a divergence less than 20 degrees, for instance. Furthermore, it may be desirable to minimize light emission below 90 degrees to minimize glare and to meet RP 1 criteria. A direct portion of the intensity distribution output by theluminaire 1200 can includeangular ranges - The
luminaire 1200 includes asubstrate 210 that is elongated along the y-axis (perpendicular to the sectional plane ofFIG. 12A ). A plurality of LEEs (e.g., LEDs) 212 are distributed along a longitudinal dimension of thesubstrate 210. A normal to a surface of thesubstrate 210 is oriented along the z-axis. TheLEEs 212 emit, during operation, light in a first angular range with respect to the z-axis. - The
luminaire 1200 includes one or moreprimary optics 220, alight guide 230, a secondary optic 240 (or may also be referred to as optical extractor), and first and secondtertiary optics FIG. 12A , theprimary optics 220, thelight guide 230 and thesecondary optic 240 are fabricated from transparent materials such as glass, plastics, and the like, and have a full cross-section. Such optical components are referred to as solid optics, e.g., solid primary optics, solid secondary optic, etc. In other implementations, one or more of theprimary optics 220 or thelight guide 230 can be fabricated from or have coatings of reflective materials (e.g., Al, Ag, dielectric film reflectors, or any other reflective materials or any combinations thereof) certain reflective dielectrics, and the like, and have hollow cross-section. The latter optical components can be referred to as hollow optics. Examples of such primary optics 220 (optical couplers) are discussed below in connection with FIGS.34-36. Referring again toFIG. 12A , the one or more solidprimary optics 220 are arranged in an elongated configuration along the longitudinal dimension and coupled with theLEEs 212. Moreover, the one or more solidprimary optics 220 are shaped to redirect light received from theLEEs 212 in the first angular range, and to provide the redirected light in a second angular range. A divergence of the second angular range is smaller than a divergence of the first angular range at least in a plane x-z perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension of theluminaire 1200. - The solid
light guide 230 also is elongated in the longitudinal dimension. The solidlight guide 230 is coupled to the one or more solidprimary optics 220 to receive the light provided by the solidprimary optic 220 in the second angular range. Additionally, the solidlight guide 230 is shaped to guide the light received from the solidprimary optic 220 in the second angular range and to provide the guided light in substantially the same second angular range to the solidsecondary optic 240. - The solid
secondary optic 240 also is elongated in the longitudinal dimension. Further, the solidsecondary optic 240 is coupled to the solidlight guide 230 to receive the light provided by the solidlight guide 230 in the second angular range. Moreover, the solidsecondary optic 240 extracts the received light into first and second output angular ranges 142, 142′, as described in detail herein in connection withFIG. 2A . In the example implementation illustrated inFIG. 12A , the solidsecondary optic 240 has a symmetric profile in a cross-sectional plane x-y perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension of theluminaire 1200, such that the first and second output angular ranges 142, 142′ have the same divergence. In addition, a redirecting surface of the solidsecondary optic 240 of theluminaire 1200 is described herein in connection withFIG. 2C . A shape of the redirectingsurface 243 of theluminaire 1200, e.g., a relative position of the three apexes thereof, 2411, 241, 2444, and a relative orientation of facets of the redirecting surface defined by the apexes, can separate each of the first and second output angular ranges 142, 142′ into portions of extracted light that can be used to form indirect and direct components of an intensity distribution associated with theluminaire 1200. - Optical surfaces and/or interfaces of the solid
secondary optic 240 can include one or more parabolic, hyperbolic, spherical, aspherical, facetted, segmented, polygonal, or otherwise shaped portions, as described herein in connection withFIGS. 2A-2G , for example. - In the example implementation illustrated in
FIG. 12A , light provided by theluminaire 1200 in afirst portion 1242 of the first outputangular range 142 and in afirst portion 1242′ of the second outputangular range 142′ can form the indirect component of the intensity distribution associated with theluminaire 1200. As described herein, the indirect component of the intensity distribution can be used to illuminate an object (e.g., a ceiling to which theluminaire 1200 is attached) different from an illumination target, and as such, to indirectly illuminate the illumination target. - Additionally, light provided by the
luminaire 1200 in thesecond portion 1241 of the first outputangular range 142 can be redirected by the firsttertiary optic 610 in a first targetangular range 152, and light provided by theluminaire 1200 in asecond portion 1241′ of the second outputangular range 142′ can be redirected by the secondtertiary optic 610′ in a second targetangular range 152′. In this manner, the first and second target angular ranges 152, 152′ can form a direct component of the intensity distribution associated with theluminaire 1200 to directly illuminate the illumination target. Shapes of the first and second tertiary optics may be tailored to achieve the desired illumination pattern. The profile of the tertiary optic may be linear, segmented linear, free form shaped, parabolic, elliptical, hyperbolical or any other shape in order to provide the desired function. According to some embodiments the optical power of the tertiary optic exists only in the plane perpendicular to the linear direction of the luminaire enabling manufacturing by extrusion of such optical part or a standard sheet metal bending process. In a different embodiment the tertiary optic has optical power both in direction of the linear array and perpendicular to it. - While the foregoing embodiments of luminaires have a symmetry plane extending in the luminaire's longitudinal dimension, asymmetric form factors are also possible. For example, in some embodiments, only one tertiary optic can be used to redirect the light extracted from by a secondary optic.
FIG. 12B shows an example of such anasymmetric luminaire 1250, that can be configured to provide both direct and indirect illumination on an illumination target. In the example illustrated inFIG. 12B , theluminaire 1250 is elongated along the y-axis and includes asubstrate 210, a plurality ofLEEs 212, one or more primary optics 220 (configured as an optical coupler), alight guide 230, a secondary optic 240 (configured as an optical extractor), and a tertiary optic including at least onereflector 610. Because theprimary optics 220, thelight guide 230 and thesecondary optic 240 are fabricated from transparent materials that have a full cross-section (in this example), these optical components are referred to as solid optics. - The
substrate 210 has first and second opposing surfaces, such that each of the first and second surfaces are elongated and have a longitudinal dimension (along the y-axis, perpendicular to the page) and a transverse dimension (along the x-axis) shorter than the longitudinal dimension. TheLEEs 212 are arranged on the first surface of thesubstrate 210 and are distributed along the longitudinal dimension, such that theLEEs 212 emit, during operation, light in a first angular range with respect to a normal to the first surface of the substrate 210 (along the z-axis). The one or more solidprimary optics 220 can be arranged in an elongated configuration along the longitudinal dimension of the first surface and are coupled with the LEEs. In some implementations, the one or moreprimary optics 220 may include indexing and reference features that can be used to accurately and repeatedly position theprimary optics 220 to theLEEs 212. The one or more solidprimary optics 220 are shaped to redirect light received from theLEEs 212 in the first angular range, and to provide the redirected light in a second angular range. A divergence of the second angular range is smaller than a divergence of the first angular range at least in a plane x-z perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension of theluminaire 1250. Examples of such solid primary optics 220 (couplers) are described in detail below in connection withFIGS. 34-36 . - The solid
light guide 230 includes input and output ends 231, 232. The input and output ends of the solidlight guide light guide 231 can be coupled to the one or more solidprimary optics 220 to receive the light provided by the solidprimary optic 220 in the second angular range. Additionally, the solidlight guide 230 is shaped to guide the light received from the solidprimary optic 220 in the second angular range and to provide the guided light in substantially the same second angular range with respect to the first surface of thesubstrate 210 at the output end of the solidlight guide 232. - The solid
secondary optic 240 includes aninput end 232′, a redirectingsurface 243 opposing theinput end 232′ and first and second output surfaces 246, 248. Each of theinput end 232′, and redirecting 243,first output 246 andsecond output 248 surfaces of the solidsecondary optic 240 are elongated along the longitudinal dimension. The input end of the solidsecondary optic 231′ is coupled to the output end of the solidlight guide 232 to receive the light provided by the solidlight guide 230 in the second angular range. The redirectingsurface 243 has first andsecond portions input end 232′ of the solid secondary optic in the second angular range, and provide the reflected light in third and fourth angular ranges with respect to the normal to the first surface of thesubstrate 210 towards the first and second output surfaces 246, 248, respectively. Here, at least prevalent directions of propagation of light in the third and fourth angular ranges are different from each other and from a prevalent direction of propagation of light in the second angular range at least perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension of the first surface of thesubstrate 210. In the example implementation illustrated inFIG. 12B , the first and second portions of the redirectingsurface FIG. 2C ). Thus, divergences of the third and fourth angular ranges are different from a divergence of the second angular range. Additionally, if a curvature of the first portion of the redirectingsurface 242 is different from a curvature of the second portion of the redirectingsurface 244, then the divergences of the third and fourth angular ranges also are different from each other. In general, the first and second portions of the redirectingsurface FIGS. 2A-2G , for example. - Referring again to
FIG. 12B , thefirst output surface 246 is shaped to refract the light provided by the first portion of the redirectingsurface 242 in the third angular range as first refracted light, and to output the first refracted light in a fifthangular range 142 with respect to the normal to the first surface of thesubstrate 210 outside thefirst output surface 246 of the solid secondary optic. A shape of thefirst output surface 246 can be tailored such that the fifthangular range 142 is different than or substantially the same as the third angular range. Additionally, thesecond output surface 248 is shaped to refract the light provided by the second portion of the redirectingsurface 244 in the fourth angular range as second refracted light, and to output the second refracted light in a sixthangular range 142′ with respect to the normal of the first surface of thesubstrate 210 outside thesecond output surface 248 of the solid secondary optic. A shape of thesecond output surface 248 can be tailored such that the sixthangular range 142′ is different than or substantially the same as the fourth angular range. - The
reflector 610 is elongated along the longitudinal dimension and is arranged to, at least in part, face thefirst output surface 246 of the solid secondary optic. Thereflector 610 is shaped to reflect at least some of the light output by thefirst output surface 246 of the solid secondary optic in the fifthangular range 142 as first reflected light in a seventhangular range 152 with respect to the normal to the first surface of thesubstrate 210. Here, at least a prevalent direction of propagation of light of the seventhangular range 152 is different from a prevalent direction of propagation of light of the fifthangular range 142 at least in a plane x-z perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension. - In some implementations, the
reflector 610 is spaced apart from thefirst output surface 246 of the solid secondary optic. For example, thereflector 610 can be thermally coupled to thesubstrate 210 to extract at least some of the heat generated by the LEEs during operation. In other implementations, an edge of thereflector 610 can be coupled to an edge of thefirst output surface 246 of the solid secondary optic, along an edge where the solidsecondary optic 240 is attached to thelight guide 230. Moreover, at least a portion of thereflector 610 can be an involute of (e.g., has a shape that matches the shape of) at least a portion of thefirst output surface 246 of the solid secondary optic. - In the example implementation shown in
FIG. 12B , a first portion of the intensity distribution output by theluminaire 1250 during operation includes at least some of the first reflected light having the seventhangular range 152. Additionally, a second portion of the intensity distribution output by theluminaire 1250 during operation includes at least some of the light output by thesecond output surface 248 of the solid secondary optic within the sixthangular range 142′. - Diffusing power can be added on the first and second output surfaces 246, 248, the
reflector 610 of the tertiary optic, or added in form of a separate diffuser in order to increase illuminance uniformity at the target surface. - While the
luminaire 1250 is an example of an asymmetric luminaire including (i) anoptical extractor 240 with a symmetric profile in a cross-sectional plane x-z, and (ii) a single reflector of the tertiary optic, other asymmetric form factors are possible. For example, in some embodiments, the optical extractor can have an asymmetric profile in cross-section, resulting in an asymmetric intensity profile in cross-section.FIG. 13A shows an exemplary embodiment of such anasymmetric luminaire 1300. Here, theasymmetric luminaire 1300 is elongated along the y-axis and includesoptical coupler 220,light guide 230, and an asymmetricoptical extractor 1310.FIG. 13B shows a top view (in plane x-y) of theasymmetric luminaire 1300. The light source of theasymmetric luminaire 1300 includes a plurality ofLEEs 210 distributed along asubstrate 2110, elongated along the y-axis. -
FIG. 13C shows aspects of theoptical extractor 1310 of theasymmetric luminaire 1300. Theoptical extractor 1310 was simulated and includes tailoredreflective surfaces exit surfaces asymmetric luminaire 1300 corresponding tooutput surface 1312 is referred to as side “B” of theasymmetric luminaire 1300, and the opposing side corresponding tooutput surface 1314 is referred to as side “A” of theasymmetric luminaire 1300.Surfaces light guide 230.Surfaces vertex 1325.FIG. 13D shows a polar plot of a simulated intensity profile of theluminaire asymmetric 1300. An intensity distribution of light output through light-exit surfaces asymmetric luminaire 1300 includeslobes - In general,
optical extractor 1310 may have varying degrees of asymmetry with respect to a plane of symmetry oflight guide 230 which extends in the longitudinal dimension of luminaire 1300 (denoted by dottedline 1301 inFIG. 13C ). For example,vertex 1325 may intersect or be displaced (laterally offset) from the symmetry plane.Surfaces surfaces surfaces optical extractor 1310 to a work surface. - Curved light-
exit surfaces - Accordingly, as a result of the asymmetry in
optical extractor 1310,asymmetric luminaire 1300 has an asymmetric intensity profile in the cross-sectional plane. For example,luminaire 1300 can be designed to direct more light to one side of the light guide than the other. Alternatively, or additionally,luminaire 1300 can be designed to direct light into different angular ranges on different sides oflight guide 230. -
FIG. 13E shows an exemplary embodiment of aluminaire 1350 including theasymmetric luminaire 1300 and a tertiary optic (or also referred to as secondary reflector), such astertiary optic 610. Theoptical extractor 1310 outputs light on side A of theasymmetric luminaire 1300 in a firstoutput angular range 1317, and additional light on side B of theasymmetric luminaire 1300 in a secondoutput angular range 1315. The secondoutput angular range 1315 can be used to provide indirect illumination on a work surface, e.g., by illuminating the ceiling above the work surface. Thereflector 610 of the tertiary optic can shape the light output by theoptical extractor 1310 in the firstangular range 1317, and redirect the shaped light in anangular range 1240 to provide direct illumination of the work surface.FIG. 13F shows a polar plot of theillumination distribution 1390 associated with theluminaire 1350, including anintensity lobe 1315 corresponding to the indirect component of theillumination distribution 1390, and anintensity pattern 1240 corresponding to the direct component of the same. - In some embodiments, the tertiary optic can be placed in proximity or aligned with an edge of the
light guide 230. For example, an edge of the tertiary optic can be substantially parallel with an edge of thelight guide 230.FIG. 13G shows a perspective view of anexample luminaire 1360 with a variable placement of atertiary optic 610 along a length of the light guide. Dependent on its placement, thetertiary optic 610 of the tertiary optic can redirect the light output in anangular range 1317 of theoptical extractor 1310. For example, placement of the tertiary optic in position A redirects the light output in theangular range 1317 to anangular range 1240, position B redirects the light output in theangular range 1317 to anangular range 1240′, position C redirects the light output in theangular range 1317 to anangular range 1240″, and position D redirects the light output in theangular range 1317 to anangular range 1240″″. The placement of thetertiary optic 610 can be fixed or adjustable (e.g., by a user or by an electronic control mechanism). -
FIG. 13G shows a perspective view of anexample luminaire 1360′ with three optical couplers 220-1, 220-2, 220-3 in which a planar tertiary optic 610-1 extends along a portion of the length of thelight guide 230 for the width (parallel to y) of the optical coupler 220-1. Theexample luminaire 1360′ may optionally be configured to allow variable placement of the tertiary optic 610-1. - In some embodiments, the
tertiary optic 610 can be mechanically adapted to change the prevalent direction of the propagation of light output by the luminaire.FIG. 13J shows an example of aluminaire 1370 with an adjustabletertiary optic 610. In this example, the tertiary optic can be rotated about a pivot axis 1332 (parallel to the y-axis) that is parallel to an edge of thelight guide 230 or parallel to a longitudinal extension of an angular range, such asangular range 1317 inFIG. 13E , for instance. The pivot axis is provided by a suitable pivot mechanism (not illustrated). The adjustment of thetertiary optic 610 can be controlled mechanically, for example by acontrol unit 1342 operatively coupled with the pivot mechanism. Thecontrol unit 1342 can receiveinput 1344 from a user (e.g., through a computer system or a network control system) or a sensor 1346 (e.g., a light intensity sensor or a daylight sensor) and adjust the position of thetertiary optic 610 based, at least in part, on the receivedinput 1344. - In some embodiments, the position of the tertiary optic can be adjusted manually. In some embodiments, the tertiary optics can be detachable and/or replaceable components. The detachable and/or replaceable tertiary optics can be provided in different shapes or reflective properties to create a desired illumination pattern. In some embodiments, the tertiary optics can have pre-defined positions at which the tertiary optic can be locked in place.
- The
tertiary optic 610 can be configured to let some light pass by or transmit and/or reflect a portion of light that is output by a luminaire.FIGS. 13K-L show views of an example of aluminaire 1380 including a tertiary optic that includesgaps 619 in thetertiary optic 610. In this example, light can pass through thegaps 619 in thetertiary optic 610. As such, light from theextractor 1310 in an outputangular range 1317 is redirected by thetertiary optic 610 to anangular range 1240 or passed into an outputangular range 1317′ defined by thegaps 619 in thetertiary optic 610. In some embodiments, the tertiary optic includes transmitting portions, for example transparent or translucent windows or other portions and/or materials that allow at least a portion of light to be transmitted through the tertiary optic. In some embodiments, such windows can include light conversion materials. -
FIG. 13M shows examples of atertiary optic 1390 that includeslight transmitting components light transmitting component 1394 is substantially transparent, and thelight transmitting components plain transmitting component 1394. In this example,light transmitting component 1396 diffuses light substantially parallel to the y-axis andlight transmitting component 1398 diffuses light substantially within the x-z plane. As such, input angular range 1317-1 and output angular range 1392-1 are substantially the same; input angular range 1317-2 is wider in y direction than output angular range 1392-2; and input angular range 1317-3 is wider within the x-z plane than output angular range 1392-3. It is noted that the term “input angular range” in the context ofFIG. 13M is used to refer only to those portions of light from the extractor (not illustrated) that impinge on a respectivelight transmitting component -
FIG. 13N shows different optional shapes of tertiary optics to create different illumination patterns. In some embodiments, a luminaire can be equipped with replaceable tertiary optics, such as 610-A, 610-B, or 610-C. - The surface profile of the
reflector 610 can be tailored to obtain a desiredpattern 1240 corresponding to the direct component of theillumination distribution 1390 associated with theluminaire 1350. Thereflector 610 of the tertiary optic can be fabricated from a reflective material, a reflectively coated substrate such as a sheet metal, plastic or other material, for example. Thereflector 610 of the tertiary optic can have optical power only in the x-z plane, or additionally in other planes. Depending on the embodiment, thereflector 610 may be formed by a conventional metal bending processes. - In some embodiments, multiple luminaire modules (e.g.,
luminaire module 200,asymmetric luminaires 1300, or luminaires 1350) can be arranged into a luminaire system that provides a desired intensity profile. For example, referring toFIGS. 14A-14C , an indirectdirect troffer luminaire 1400 includes fourluminaire modules FIG. 13E . An intensity distribution provided by each of the fourluminaire modules intensity distribution 1390 associated with theluminaire 1350. Theluminaire modules surface 1312 of theoptical extractor 1310 corresponding to side B of the luminaire 1350) faces away from the square, and thereflector 610 points inward of the square. Only thereflector 610 of the tertiary optic ofluminaire module 1411 is labeled inFIG. 14B . - In the example implementation shown in
FIGS. 14A-14C , each pair of adjacent luminaire modules is connected by one ofconnector elements connector elements more connector elements more luminaire modules - In some implementations, the outer circumference of the indirect
direct troffer luminaire 1400 may be diffuse reflective and fabricated similarly to theinner coversheet 1450 out of powder coated steel. In some implementations, an optical diffuser may be added to thereflector 610 of each of theluminaire modules modules - Depending on the embodiment, the
connector elements luminaire module 200,asymmetric luminaire 1300, orluminaire 1350, for example, and can include one or more LEEs. Passive connector elements substantially provide other than optical functions. Depending on the embodiment, theconnector elements luminaire modules connector elements - The square shaped by the flux manifolds (
modules direct troffer luminaire 1400 that can fit into a standard T-bar ceiling grid. For example, indirectdirect troffer luminaire 1400 can have a maximum dimension in the x-y plane that allows it to be accommodated in apanel 1490 having 2′×2′ footprint (i.e., in the x-y plane), corresponding to the size of conventional troffers that support fluorescent lights.FIG. 14B , for example, shows an example of a luminaire mounted within asquare panel 1490 with dimensions shown byarrows direct troffer luminaire 1400 is designed to be installed in or on a ceiling withceiling panels 1490.FIG. 14C shows that such a troffer system, which may be about 5″ deep (in the z-axis), can reach about 1″ into theceiling 1490. In this manner, the indirectdirect troffer luminaire 1400 protrudes about 4″ into the room. In other implementations, the indirectdirect troffer luminaire 1400 can be directly ceiling mounted. The direct component of the intensity distribution associated with the indirectdirect troffer luminaire 1400 is formed entirely in the inside of the square. Thereflector 610 of the tertiary optic may be manufactured of non-diffuse reflective material such asAlanod Miro Ag 4420, and acenter coversheet 1450 may be fabricated from diffuse reflective material such as powder coated steel or aluminum. Thereflector 610 andcoversheet 1450 can create a cavity of depth of about 2″, sufficient to place drive electronics and power conversion electronics, which control the LEEs ofluminaire module 1411 and of the other three modules, into the cavity. - The indirect
direct troffer luminaire 1400 may be mounted with the luminaire's longitudinal axes oriented at 45° with respect to the edges of thesquare panel 1490, however other mounting orientations are also possible. For example, the luminaire's longitudinal axes may be mounted parallel to the edges of thesquare panel 1490. An arrangement at 45 degrees or other oblique angles of the indirectdirect troffer luminaire 1400 may be used to provide more uniform illumination of rectilinear target areas. Likewise, when multiple indirectdirect troffer luminaires 1400 are required to illuminate a large space they may be arranged in a rectilinear array with their sides arranged at 45 degrees relative to the axes of the array. Rotating the square shape at 45 deg to the orientation of the ceiling grid, as illustrated inFIG. 14B , is advantageous in achieving optimum uniformity on the ceiling and work surface as the largest spacing between the square luminaire systems is in the diagonal direction. - As the solid flux manifolds (
modules direct troffer luminaire 1400 are positioned antiparallel, a symmetric intensity distribution can be obtained. The indirectdirect troffer luminaire 1400 can produce max to min uniformity ratios of better than 2:1 on the work surface and better than 10:1 on the ceiling. Referring toFIG. 14D , indirectdirect troffer luminaire 1400 can provide symmetric direct and indirect illumination in both of two orthogonal planes.Trace 1510 shows an exemplary simulated intensity profile in the x-z plane of an embodiment of indirectdirect troffer luminaire 1400, whiletrace 1520 shows the simulated intensity profile in the y-z plane. Here, 0° corresponds to the z-direction. In both planes, the luminaire provides direct illumination of similar flux corresponding to the lobes between −45° and 45°. Furthermore, in both planes, the luminaire provides indirect illumination of similar flux. The indirect illumination corresponds to lobes between 90° and 112.5° and between −90° and −112.5°.Luminaire 1400 emits negligible amounts of light into polar angles between 45° and 90°, between −45° and −90°, and between 112.5° and −112.5°. - Multiple direct-
indirect illumination luminaires 1400 can be installed in a space to provide desired illumination for a target surface. In general, the number, density, and orientation of the luminaires in the space can vary as desired to provide an overall intensity profile suitable of the target surface. In some embodiments, arrays of similarly oriented indirectdirect troffer luminaires 1400 can be arranged in a ceiling. For example, referring toFIGS. 14E-G , twenty five 2′×2′ indirectdirect troffer luminaires 1400 are arranged in a 5×5 array in a 40′×50′ space (8′×10′ spacing) with 9′ ceiling height to illuminate a target surface 2.5′ off the floor.FIG. 14E shows a contour plot of the intensity profile on the target surface.FIG. 14F shows an intensity profile through the long dimension of the target surface at X=0 mm. The illuminance varies between about 300 lux and about 450 lux across this section.FIG. 14G shows an intensity profile through the short dimension of the target surfaces at Y=0 mm. The illumination drops below 375 lux within about 1,000 mm from the edges of the target surface in this section, but stays within a range from about 375 lux to about 475 lux across the majority of the section. - While indirect
direct troffer luminaire 1400 includes four luminaire modules arranged as a square, other arrangements are possible. For example, luminaires oftypes FIG. 15A ), combinations of rectangles or other quadrilaterals (seeFIG. 15B ), hexagons (seeFIG. 15C ), octagons (seeFIG. 15D ), etc. As another example, the luminaire modules can be arranged on a circular or elliptical contour, corresponding to the contour of a polygon with a very large number of sides (N→∞). Generally, the shape of the luminaire module can be selected to fit a desired installation. For example, rectangular luminaires can be used to fit with rectangular ceiling panels. In some embodiments, the luminaire modules can be symmetric (e.g., like luminaire module 200) or asymmetric (e.g., likeluminaire module 1300.) In some embodiments, the luminaire modules can be configured in curved shapes or any other desired shape. - Non-polygonal arrangements are also possible. Generally, luminaires can be formed by arranging multiple luminaire modules in any segmented shape. For example,
asymmetric luminaire modules FIG. 16A , or such that the near-neighbor asymmetric luminaire modules have alternating asymmetries (A,B)-(B,A), as illustrated inFIG. 16B . As another example, the asymmetric luminaire modules can be arranged along parallel paths, such that asymmetric luminaire modules that face each other have common symmetries (A,B):(A,B), as illustrated inFIG. 16C , or such that the asymmetric luminaire modules that face each other have alternating symmetries (A,B):(B,A), as illustrated inFIG. 16D . As another example, the asymmetric luminaire modules can be arranged in intersecting paths (e.g., lines that intersect at 90° or at other angles), such that near-neighbor asymmetric luminaire modules of each of the intersecting paths have common asymmetries (A, B)-(A,B), as illustrated inFIG. 16E , or such that the near-neighbor asymmetric luminaire modules of each of the intersecting paths have alternating asymmetries (A, B)-(B,A), as illustrated inFIG. 16F ). In some embodiments, the luminaire modules as shown inFIGS. 16A, 16C, and 16E can be symmetric luminaire modules (e.g., likesymmetric luminaire module 200.) - The foregoing embodiments discussion with reference to
FIGS. 13-16 involve luminaire modules that direct light to both sides of the light guide, either in a symmetric or asymmetric manner. Other configurations are also possible. For example, in some embodiments, luminaire modules can be configured to direct light to only one side of the light guide. For example, referring toFIGS. 17A-17C , aluminaire 1700 is designed to direct light in the positive x-direction, but not in the negative x-direction.Luminaire 1700 includes acarrier 1710 that houses sixLEEs 1714 mounted on astrip 1712, and a correspondingoptical coupler 1720 mounted adjacent each LEE.Optical couplers 1720 are shaped to collimate light fromLEEs 1714 in two orthogonal planes.Luminaire 1700 also includes alight guide 1730 and anoptical extractor 1740.Optical extractor 1740 includes a reflectiveoptical interface 1742 and alight exit surface 1744. In cross-section, both reflectiveoptical interface 1742 andlight exit surface 1744 are convex (as viewed in the direction of propagation of light) in shape. However,light exit surface 1744 has a constant radius of curvature while the radius of curvature ofoptical interface 1742 varies. During operation,optical couplers 1720 collimate light fromLEEs 1714 and direct the light tolight guide 1730. The light propagates downlight guide 1730 tooptical extractor 1740, and reflects fromoptical interface 1742 about out of the luminaire throughlight exit surface 1744.FIGS. 17B and 17C also show a mountingfixture 1750 andattachment brackets 1752 which attachluminaire 1700 to mountingfixture 1750. -
FIG. 17D shows a diagrammatic representation of an example of aluminaire 1700 including at least asubstrate 110, one ormore LEEs 112 disposed on thesubstrate 110, one or moreoptical couplers 120, anoptional light guide 1730, and anoptical extractor 1740. In this example, theluminaire 1700 is elongated along the y-axis, perpendicular to the page. TheLEEs 112 emit light during operation in a firstangular range 115 with respect to a normal to thesubstrate 110.Optical couplers 120 receive light in the firstangular range 115 fromLEEs 112. Eachoptical coupler 120 is configured to redirect the light received in the firstangular range 115 into a light with a secondangular range 125. The light with the secondangular range 125 can be directed into theoptional light guide 1730. If theoptional light guide 1730 is not part of theluminaire 1700, theoptical couplers 120 redirect the light with the secondangular range 125 into theoptical extractor 1740. - The
light guide 1730 can guide the light to a distal end of thelight guide 1730 away fromLEEs 112. Thelight guide 1730 provides the guided light at the distal end in anangular range 1735. In some embodiments, thelight guide 1730 can be shaped to guide the light received from theoptical couplers 120 in the secondangular range 125 and to provide the guided light in substantially the same second angular range (1735 125) at the output end of the light guide. -
Optical extractor 1740 receives light with theangular range 1735 that exits thelight guide 1730 or, when thelight guide 1730 is not part of theluminaire 1700, theoptical extractor 1740 receives the light with theangular range 125 provided by theoptical couplers 120.Optical extractor 1740 can include a reflective interface that reflects at least a portion of the received light, which then exits luminaire 1700 (indicated by arrows) with an outputangular range 1746. The outputangular range 1746 at which light exitsluminaire 1700 depends, among other things, on the properties of optical extractor 1740 (e.g., geometry of the optical interfaces and optical properties of the materials forming the extractor). These properties can be tailored to provide extraction profiles desirable for specific lighting applications. - In some embodiments,
luminaire 1700 can include one or more optional tertiary optics, such as 1750 or 1750′, positioned to receive at least some light that is output by theoptical extractor 1740 inangular range 1746. The optional secondary reflector(s) 1750, 1750′ can redirect light received from theoptical extractor 1740 intoangular ranges 1752 and/or 1752′ to provide a desired illumination pattern. For example, the tertiary optic can be configured to redirect light into a single direction, as shown bytertiary optic 1750, or in several directions, as shown bytertiary optic 1750′. -
FIG. 17E shows an example of anoptical extractor 1760 configured to redirect light in a single direction. In this example, theoptical extractor 1760 is elongated along the y-axis, perpendicular to the page. Theoptical extractor 1760 can include a reflectiveoptical interface 1742 and alight exit surface 1744. The light entering theoptical extractor 1760 can be redirected by the reflectiveoptical interface 1742. The light exit surface can be planar and the light redirected by the reflective optical interface can be emitted through thelight exit surface 1744 in anangular range 1746. -
FIG. 17F shows an example of anoptical extractor 1770 configured to emit a portion, and redirect another portion of the light received byoptical extractor 1770. In this example, theoptical extractor 1770 is elongated along the y-axis, perpendicular to the page. Theoptical extractor 1770 can includelight exit surfaces optical interface 1742, which corresponds to one of the light exit surfaces. In this example, the reflectiveoptical interface 1742 corresponds to thelight exit surface 1744. A portion of the light received by theoptical extractor 1770 can exit theoptical extractor 1770 through thelight exit surface 1748 with anangular range 1737, e.g., in a forward direction. Another portion of the light received by theoptical extractor 1770 can be redirected by the reflectiveoptical interface 1742 and exit theoptical extractor 1770 through thelight exit surface 1744 with anangular range 1746, e.g., in a predominantly backward direction. In some embodiments, the light exit surface(s) 1748 and/or 1744 can include a light conversion layer and/or an anti-reflection layer (e.g. AR coating). - Luminaire modules that direct light to only one side of the light guide (e.g., luminaire module 1700) are suitable for applications such as task lighting, cabinet lighting, wall wash or other lighting, where they are used to illuminate a work surfaces such as a table, a desk, countertops, walls or other target surfaces. They can be configured to uniformly illuminate an area of the work surface, while also illuminating a backsplash to the work surface.
FIG. 18 shows a simulated intensity distribution for an exemplary embodiment ofluminaire module 1700. In this plot, 0° corresponds to the positive x-direction.Trace 1810 corresponds to intensity profile in the x-z plane andtrace 1820 corresponds to the intensity profile in the x-y plane. In both planes, substantially all of the light is directed into angles between −45° and 45°, with peak flux at approximately −22.5° and 22.5°. In the x-z plane, the intensity profile is asymmetric, the luminaire providing significant flux at larger negative angles (i.e., out to about −45°), while the flux drops off significantly more at corresponding positive angles. Accordingly, such a luminaire module can efficiently illuminate a backsplash without directing corresponding amounts of light off the front of the work surface. -
FIGS. 19A-19C show plots of the simulated intensity distribution from an installation composed of two luminaire modules on a 1200 mm×600 mm work surface. The X-axis shows the long dimension of the work surface and the Y-axis shows the short dimension.FIG. 19A shows a contour plot of the illuminance across the work surface,FIG. 19B shows a plot of illuminance (in lux) vs. Y position (in mm) at X=0 mm, andFIG. 19C shows a plot of illuminance (in lux) vs. X position (in mm). Illuminance varies between about 300 lux and 600 lux in the Y-direction and between about 400 lux and about 500 lux for the central 1,000 mm of the work surface in the X-direction, falling off nearer to the edges. -
FIGS. 20A-20C show plots of the simulated intensity distribution from the same installation as depicted inFIGS. 19A-19C on a 2,000 mm×400 mm back surface. The X-axis shows the long dimension of the back surface and the Y-axis shows the short dimension.FIG. 20A shows a contour plot of the illuminance across the work surface,FIG. 20B shows a plot of illuminance (in lux) vs. Y position (in mm) at X=0 mm, andFIG. 20C shows a plot of illuminance (in lux) vs. X position (in mm). Illuminance varies between about 150 lux and 250 lux in the Y-direction up to the top 100 mm of the back surface, where it falls off, and between about 150 lux and about 250 lux for the central 1,000 mm of the back surface in the X-direction, falling off nearer to the edges. - In some embodiments, certain components of the luminaires described previously can be omitted from the design. For example, certain embodiments need not include a light guide to guide light from the optical coupler to the optical extractor. Where the collimation of the collectors is sufficient, they may be sufficient to direct the light to the optical extractor without the need to confine the light to a light guide. Moreover, such embodiments need not include a transparent optical element for the optical extractor, and instead can be composed of one or more reflective surfaces. For example,
FIGS. 21A and 21B show an embodiment of aluminaire 2100 similar toluminaire 1700 that includes acurved mirror 2130 spaced apart fromprimary optics 2120, rather than a light guide and solid optical extractor.Luminaire 2100 also includes astrip 2110 supporting sixLEEs 2112 andelectrical connector 2111. Each collector is positioned adjacent a corresponding LEE and collimates light emitted from the LEE directing the light towardsmirror 2130. The collectors are designed to collimate light in two orthogonal planes.Mirror 2130 has a concave surface shaped to redirect the light from the collectors to illuminate a work surface. -
FIG. 22 shows a simulated intensity distribution for an exemplary embodiment ofluminaire 2100. In this plot, 0° corresponds to the positive x-direction.Trace 2210 corresponds to the intensity profile in the x-z plane andtrace 2220 corresponds to the intensity profile in the x-y plane. In both planes, substantially all of the illumination is directed into angles between −45° and 45°, with peak flux at approximately −22.5° and 22.5° in the x-y plane and at about 35° in the x-z plane. In the x-z plane, the intensity profile is asymmetric, the luminaire providing higher flux at positive angles. -
FIGS. 23A-23C show plots of the simulated intensity distribution from an installation composed of two luminaires on a 2,000 mm×600 mm work surface. The X-axis shows the long dimension of the work surface and the Y-axis shows the short dimension.FIG. 23A shows a contour plot of the illuminance across the work surface,FIG. 23B shows a plot of illuminance (in lux) vs. Y position (in mm) at X=0 mm, andFIG. 23C shows a plot of illuminance (in lux) vs. X position (in mm). Illuminance varies between about 300 lux and 600 lux in the Y-direction and between about 300 lux and about 600 lux for the central 1,200 mm of the work surface in the X-direction, falling off nearer to the edges. -
FIGS. 24A-24C show plots of the simulated intensity distribution from the same installation as depicted inFIGS. 23A-23C on a 2,000 mm×400 mm back surface. The X-axis shows the long dimension of the back surface and the Y-axis shows the short dimension.FIG. 24A shows a contour plot of the illuminance across the work surface,FIG. 24B shows a plot of illuminance (in lux) vs. Y position (in mm) at X=0 mm, andFIG. 24C shows a plot of illuminance (in lux) vs. X position (in mm). Illuminance varies between about 150 lux and 300 lux in the Y-direction up to the top 100 mm of the back surface, where it falls off, and between about 50 lux and about 150 lux for the central 1,200 mm of the back surface in the X-direction, falling off nearer to the edges. -
FIG. 25 shows another example of atask light luminaire 2500.Luminaire 2500 includessubstrate 2110,LEEs 2112,optical coupler 2520 andreflector 2530. In contrast to the optical couplers inluminaire 2100, which provide collimation in two directions,optical coupler 2520 provides collimation only in the x-z plane. -
FIG. 26 shows a simulated intensity distribution for an exemplary embodiment ofluminaire 2500. In this plot, 0° corresponds to the positive x-direction.Trace 2610 corresponds to the intensity profile in the x-z plane andtrace 2620 corresponds to the intensity profile in the x-y plane. In both planes, substantially all of the illumination is directed into angles between −45° and 45°, although in the x-y plane the intensity distribution is approximately lambertian, composed of a single lobe with peak flux at 0°. In the x-z plane, the distribution has two distinct lobes, with peak flux at approximately −22.5° and about 35°. In the x-z plane, the intensity profile is asymmetric, the luminaire providing higher flux at positive angles. -
FIGS. 27A-27C show plots of the simulated intensity distribution from an installation composed of two luminaires on a 2,000 mm×600 mm work surface. The X-axis shows the long dimension of the work surface and the Y-axis shows the short dimension.FIG. 27A shows a contour plot of the illuminance across the work surface,FIG. 27B shows a plot of illuminance (in lux) vs. Y position (in mm) at X=0 mm, andFIG. 27C shows a plot of illuminance (in lux) vs. X position (in mm). Illuminance varies between about 400 lux and 600 lux in the Y-direction (except close to one edge, where it falls off) and between about 300 lux and about 500 lux for the central 1,000 mm of the work surface in the X-direction, falling off nearer to the edges. -
FIGS. 27D-27F show plots of the simulated intensity distribution from the same installation as depicted inFIGS. 27A-27C on a 2,000 mm×400 mm back surface. The X-axis shows the long dimension of the back surface and the Y-axis shows the short dimension.FIG. 27D shows a contour plot of the illuminance across the work surface,FIG. 27E shows a plot of illuminance (in lux) vs. Y position (in mm) at X=0 mm, andFIG. 27F shows a plot of illuminance (in lux) vs. X position (in mm). Illuminance varies between about 200 lux and 350 lux in the Y-direction up to the top 100 mm of the back surface, where it falls off, and between about 100 lux and about 250 lux for the central 1,000 mm of the back surface in the X-direction, falling off nearer to the edges. -
FIG. 28A shows another example of aluminaire 2800 that features hollow components that are elongated along the y-axis. Theluminaire 2800 is configured to provide asymmetric illumination in cross-section x-z and includes asubstrate 2110, a plurality ofLEEs 2112, one or moreprimary optics 2120, asecondary optic 2830 and atertiary optic 2840. - The
substrate 2110 has first and second opposing surfaces, such that each of the first and second surfaces are elongated and have a longitudinal dimension (along the y-axis) and a transverse dimension (along the x-axis) shorter than the longitudinal dimension. TheLEEs 2112 are arranged on the first surface of thesubstrate 2110 and are distributed along the longitudinal dimension, such that the LEEs emit, during operation, light in a first angular range with respect to a normal to the first surface of thesubstrate 2110. For example, a divergence of the first angular can be between 150-180 degrees. - The one or more
primary optics 2120 are arranged in an elongated configuration along the longitudinal dimension of the first surface and are coupled with theLEEs 2112. The one or moreprimary optics 2120 are shaped to redirect light received from theLEEs 2112 in the first angular range, and to provide the redirected light in a secondangular range 125. A divergence of the secondangular range 125 is smaller than the divergence of the first angular range at least in a plane x-z perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension of the first surface of thesubstrate 2110. In some implementations, the one or moreprimary optics 2120 can be configured as one or more solid primary optics. Examples of hollow and solid primary optics 2120 (couplers) are described in detail below in connection withFIGS. 34-36 . - The
secondary optic 2830 includes a redirectingsurface 2833 elongated along the longitudinal dimension. The redirectingsurface 2833 of thesecondary optic 2830 is spaced apart from and facing the one or more of theprimary optics 2120. First and second portions of the redirectingsurface primary optics 2120 in the secondangular range 125, and provide the reflected light in third and fourth angular ranges 142, 142′ with respect to the normal to the first surface of thesubstrate 2110, respectively. At least prevalent directions of the third and fourth angular ranges 142, 142′ are different from each other and from a prevalent direction of propagation of light of the secondangular range 125 at least perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension of the first surface of thesubstrate 2110. - In some embodiments, the secondary optic (e.g., secondary optic 2830) can have discontinuities along a longitudinal dimension. For example, the secondary optic can be perforated or include gaps (not illustrated in
FIG. 28A ) to permit some of the received light to pass through the secondary optic. - A tertiary optic includes a
reflector 2840 elongated along the longitudinal dimension. Thereflector 2840 is spaced apart from and facing the first portion of the redirecting surface of thesecondary optic 2830. In addition, thereflector 2840 is shaped to reflect at least some of the light provided by the first portion of the redirecting surface of thesecondary optic 2833 in the thirdangular range 142 with respect to the normal of the first surface of thesubstrate 2110 as first reflected light in a fifthangular range 152 with respect to the normal to the first surface of thesubstrate 2110. The fifthangular range 152 is different than the thirdangular range 142. In some implementations, thereflector 2840 can be thermally coupled with thesubstrate 2910 to extract heat produced by theLEEs 2112 during operation. In some embodiments, the tertiary optic can include discontinuities (e.g., gaps or openings) to allow some light to pass through the tertiary optic. In some embodiments, thereflector 2840 and the redirectingsurface 2833 can have different types of reflectivity (e.g., specular reflection, diffuse reflection, etc.), such that additional variable angular ranges of redirected light can be created from thereflector 2840 and redirectingsurface 2833 along a longitudinal dimension of the luminaire. - A first portion of an intensity distribution output by the
luminaire 2800 during operation includes at least some of the first reflected light from the fifthangular range 152. A second portion of the intensity distribution output by theluminaire 2800 during operation includes at least some of the light provided by the second portion of the redirecting surface of thesecondary optic 2832′ within the fourthangular range 142′. - Optical surfaces and/or interfaces of the
secondary optic 2830 and/or thereflector 2840 of the tertiary optics can include one or more parabolic, hyperbolic, spherical, aspherical, facetted, segmented, polygonal, or otherwise shaped portions, as described herein in connection withFIGS. 2A-2G , for example. - In some embodiments, a secondary optic can have one or more openings of one or more suitable shapes, for example as shown in
FIG. 2F .FIG. 28B shows an example of aluminaire 2800′ that includes a secondary optic with aslot 245. A portion of light received from the one or moreprimary optics 2120 in the secondangular range 125 can be reflected by redirectingsurfaces angular ranges primary optics 2120 can pass through theslot 245 of the redirecting surface(s) in an angular range 2852 (e.g., in a forward direction). -
FIGS. 28C-D show examples ofsecondary optics 2830.FIG. 28C shows an example of asecondary optic 2830 with redirectingsurfaces FIG. 28D shows an example of asecondary optic 2830′ including multiple redirectingelements 2835. The multiple redirectingelements 2835 can be arranged and configured such that thesecondary optic 2830′ provides optical power both in direction of the linear array and perpendicular to it. - While the foregoing embodiments of luminaires featuring hollow portions are designed to provide asymmetric illumination in cross-section, other configurations are also possible. For example, referring to
FIGS. 29A-29C , ahollow luminaire 2900 is designed to provide a symmetric intensity profile in cross-section.Luminaire 2900 is elongated along the y-axis and includes ahousing 2902 that includes asubstrate 2910 with a plurality ofLEEs 2912 and acollector 2920. - The LEEs emit light, during operation, in a first angular range with respect to a normal to the substrate 2910 (along the z-axis).
Collector 2920 includes one or more hollow primary optics that include curved surfaces extending alongstrip 2910. Thecollector 2920 is shaped to redirect light received from theLEEs 2912 in the first angular range, and to provide the redirected light in a second angular range, such that a divergence of the second angular range is smaller than a divergence of the first angular range at least in a plane x-z perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension of theluminaire 2900. - A secondary optic including a
reflector 2930 is positioned in the path of light emitted from theLEEs 2912 and redirected bycollector 2920 in the second angular range. Thereflector 2930 of the primary optic includes two planarreflective surfaces luminaire 2900 has asymmetry plane z-y 2901, which intersects thereflector 2930 at thevertex 2935 of the v-shape formed by thereflective surfaces surfaces collector 2920 in the second angular range, and provide the reflected light in third and fourth angular ranges with respect to the z-axis, respectively. At least prevalent directions of the third and fourth angular ranges are different from each other and from a prevalent direction of propagation of light of the second angular range, at least perpendicular to the longitudinal dimension of theluminaire 2900. -
Luminaire 2900 also includes tertiaryoptics including reflectors surfaces reflectors first reflector 2940 of the tertiary optics redirects light received from the first redirectingsurface 2932 in the third angular range as first reflected light in a fifthangular range 3010 with respect to the z-axis, such that the fifthangular range 3010 is different than the third angular range. In this manner, a direct component of an intensity distribution output by the illumination device during operation includes at least some of the first reflected light 3010. Thesecond reflector 2940′ of the tertiary optics redirects light received from the second redirectingsurface 2932′ in the fourth angular range as second reflected light in a sixthangular range 3010′ with respect to the z-axis, such that the sixthangular range 3010′ is different than the fourth angular range. In this manner, the direct component of the intensity distribution output by the illumination device during operation includes at least some of the second reflected light 3010′. - In general, the intensity distribution provided by
luminaire 2900 depends, inter alfa, on the geometry ofcollector 2920, the geometry ofreflector 2930 of the secondary optic (e.g., shape and relative orientation of the redirectingsurfaces tertiary optics collector 2920 and thesecondary optic 2930. These parameters can be tailored to provide an intensity distribution suitable for the luminaire's intended purpose. For example, the angular width of lobes in the intensity distribution in cross-section depends on the degree of collimation provided bycollectors 2920 and the amount by whichreflectors FIG. 30 shows a simulated intensity distribution for an exemplary embodiment ofluminaire 2900. In this plot, 0° corresponds to the positive z-direction.Traces trace 3020 corresponds to the intensity profile in the x-y plane. In the x-y plane the intensity distribution is approximately lambertian, composed of a single lobe with peak flux at 0°. In the x-z plane, the distribution has two distinctnarrow lobes - In some implementations, the
reflector 2930 of the secondary optic can be attached to the other components of the luminaire via mountingelements elements reflector 2930 of the secondary optic and thereflectors LEEs 2912 and thecollectors 2920. The optical components ofluminaire 2900 can be produced from a variety of materials. For example, the components can be produced from a metal, such as aluminum, or from a plastic coated with a reflective material. -
FIGS. 31A-31C show plots of the simulated intensity distribution from an installation composed of sixluminaires 2900 arranged in a 2×3 grid in spacing of 30′ in×and 20′ in y direction in a 18,000 mm×18,000 mm target surface. The luminaires are suspended 300 mm from the ceiling, which is 3,000 mm high. Such a configuration may be useful for application in a garage lighting application, where driving traffic occurs in y direction with 2 driving lanes and 4 parking rows). The X-axis shows one dimension of the target surface and the Y-axis shows the other.FIG. 31A shows a contour plot of the illuminance across the work surface,FIG. 31B shows a plot of illuminance (in lux) vs. Y position (in mm) at X=0 mm, andFIG. 31C shows a plot of illuminance (in lux) vs. X position (in mm). Illuminance varies between about 25 lux and about 75 lux in the Y-direction and between about 70 lux and about 150 lux in the X-direction. -
FIGS. 32A-32C show plots of the simulated intensity distribution from the same installation as depicted inFIGS. 31A-31C on a wall along the Y direction ofFIG. 31A . InFIG. 32A , the X-axis shows the horizontal dimension of the section and the Y-axis shows the vertical dimension. Dark regions in the intensity distribution are caused by structural elements of the building.FIG. 32A shows a contour plot of the illuminance across the section,FIG. 32B shows a plot of illuminance (in lux) vs. Y position (in mm) at X=0 mm, andFIG. 32C shows a plot of illuminance (in lux) vs. X position (in mm). Illuminance varies between about 50 lux and 250 lux in the vertical direction from the target surface up to the about midway through the section, where it falls off, and between about 100 lux and about 175 lux for the central 17,000 mm of the section in the horizontal direction, falling off nearer to the edges. -
FIGS. 33A-33C show plots of the simulated intensity distribution from the same installation as depicted inFIGS. 31A-31C on a wall along the X direction ofFIG. 31A . In FIG. - 33A, the X-axis shows the horizontal dimension of the section and the Y-axis shows the vertical dimension. A certain amount of light provided on the walls can aid in facial recognition, which may provide better comfort and security to parking garage users.
FIG. 33A shows a contour plot of the illuminance across the section,FIG. 33B shows a plot of illuminance (in lux) vs. Y position (in mm) at X=0 mm, andFIG. 33C shows a plot of illuminance (in lux) vs. X position (in mm). Illuminance varies between about 50 lux and 250 lux in the vertical direction from the target surface up to the about midway through the section, where it falls off, and between about 25 lux and about 125 lux for the central 17,000 mm of the section in the horizontal direction, falling off nearer to the edges. - Embodiments described herein can include a strip of LEEs.
FIGS. 34A, 34B and 34C illustrate in cross section examples of LEE strips 3400 that include an extrudedaluminum carrier 3434, having extended cooling surfaces, which forms a support structure for theLEE strip 3400. Athermal adhesive layer 3436 is applied to thecarrier 3434, and the substrate 3412 (having theLEE chips 3437 mounted thereon) is adhered to thelayer 3436. Thephosphor layer 3438 may be disposed in form of plates, sheets, from a slurry or otherwise, which may be flat or curved, are affixed over the top surfaces of theLEE chips 3437 by an adhesive, such as silicone. A strip of theoptical coupler sheet 3420 is then affixed over the LEE chips 3437. Spaces such as 3439 and/or 3431 may be filled with one or more materials of a suitable refractive index, for example a high or low index silicone or other encapsulant, for example. Thephosphor layer 3438 can be formed from a variety of phosphor sheets and can have varying characteristics along its length to achieve a desired uniform chromaticity and color-rendering index (CRI) along the strip 3432. As such the local characteristics of aphosphor layer 3438 proximate eachLEE chip 3437 can be matched to the characteristics of eachLEE chip 3437. - As discussed previously, a light conversion material can be incorporated into a luminaire. In some embodiments, a light conversion material, in the form of a phosphor layer, is incorporated into the LEE strip. For example, in
FIG. 34B , a flat (not illustrated) orcurved phosphor layer 3438 is separated from theLEE chip 3437 by aspace 3431. The spaced apart disposition can reduce the thermal load on thephosphor layer 3438. Thespace 3431 may be partially (not illustrated) or fully filled with an encapsulant, for example, silicone may be disposed in thespace 3431 proximate theLEE chip 3437 leaving a gap (not illustrated) between the silicone and thephosphor layer 3438. The gap can be filled with air or other low refractive-index medium to control back reflection of light from the phosphor layer. Thephosphor layer 3438 may be formed by depositing a preformed layer or by curing one or more predisposed precursor substances from which thephosphor layer 3438 is then cured. As such phosphor may be uniformly or non-uniformly deposited along the length of the LEE strip 3432. Furthermore, thephosphor layer 3438 and the previously noted encapsulant may be integrally formed. The phosphor may include Ce:YAG, TAG, nitride-based phosphors or other substances as noted herein to achieve predetermined CCTs from 2800K-5000K, for example. - In some embodiments, the
space 3431 can have an index of refraction that is less than the index of refraction of thephosphor layer 3438 and thephosphor layer 3438 can have an index of refraction that is less than or equal to an index of refraction of the material in thespace 3439. In some embodiments, a medium filling thespace 3431 can be air, and inert or other gas, or vacuum, for example. - In some embodiments, the
optical couplers 3422 are dielectric compound parabolic concentrators. Eachoptical coupler 3422 is disposed and configured to collect substantially all of the light from one or more of the LEEs in the LEE strip 3432 and narrows the solid angle of the propagation directions of light as it passes there through. As such light exiting the exit aperture of an optical coupler diverges into a smaller solid angle than light received at an entrance aperture of the optical coupler. The opening angle of the exit beams produced by theoptical couplers 3422 may be as narrow as +/−30 degrees or less, for example. Sufficient collimation is desired to reduce non-absorptive losses of light in the light guide. It is noted that these and other considerations can further depend on the wavelengths of the light provided at the entrance aperture of the optical coupler as noted herein. Depending on the embodiment, an optical coupler may be about 2 mm wide and 3 mm tall if used with a 500 p.m LED die, approximately 6 mm wide and 8 mm tall if used with small LED packages, or have other dimensions, for example. - In some embodiments, the
optical couplers 3422 are configured to narrow a broad, for example, Lambertian light emission from thephosphor layer 3438.FIG. 34B illustrates an optical coupler with an asymmetrical configuration that can redirect more light into one portion of space than in another with respect to corresponding optical axes and thereby provide light from the optical coupler having an asymmetrical intensity pattern. Depending on the configuration of other components of the luminaire, for example the length and cross sections of the light guide, an asymmetrical intensity pattern from an optical coupler may be partially or fully preserved, and may aid in providing a luminaire with predetermined photometric properties that may suit predetermined illumination applications. Asymmetric optical couplers may provide for tailoring of photometric output profiles for certain applications. It is noted that such asymmetry may be achieved via suitable asymmetric configuration of other components of the luminaire including the light pipe and/or the optical extractor, for example. -
FIG. 34D-E show views of an example of aluminaire 3450 where LEEs and optical couplers are coupled to a phosphor layer without an air gap. Theluminaire 3450 can include one or more LEEs 3437 (e.g., blue pump LEDs), aphosphor layer 3438, one or moreoptical couplers 3454, and anoptional light guide 3456. In some embodiments, theLEEs 3437 and/oroptical couplers 3454 can be coupled to the phosphor layer 3438 (e.g., bonded) without an air gap. In some embodiments, the index of refraction of thephosphor layer 3438, theoptical coupler 3454, and/or thelight guide 3456 are matched. TheLEEs 3437 can be coupled to a light input surface of thephosphor layer 3438 and theoptical couplers 3454 can be coupled to a light output surface of thephosphor layer 3438, which opposes the light input surface. Thephosphor layer 3438 can extend over a light input surface of the optical couplers 3454 (e.g., the length of a pendant). The width of thephosphor layer 3438 can be slightly larger than a width of the LEEs 3437 (e.g., 2mm for a 1mm2 LEE). In some embodiments, areflector layer 3452 can be placed on the light input surface of thephosphor layer 3438 and between theLEEs 3437. Theoptical couplers 3454 can receive the light that is output by thephosphor layer 3438 at the light output surface of thephosphor layer 3438 into the light input surface of theoptical couplers 3454 and collimates the received light. Thelight guide 3456 can be coupled (e.g., bonded) to theoptical couplers 3454 without an air gap. - In this example, the optical interface between the
LEEs 3437 and thephosphor layer 3438 can be configured such that a large amount of light from theLEEs 3437 can transmit into thephosphor layer 3438 without total internal reflection (TIR). The amount of light that may be reflected back into theLEEs 3437 can depend on how much of the light undergoes TIR, if any, and how much of the light is Fresnel reflected, which both can depend on the discontinuity in the refractive indices at the optical interface between theLEEs 3437 and thephosphor layer 3438. Additionally, some light from thephosphor layer 3438 can also reach theLEEs 3437. The amount of light that reaches theLEEs 3437 can depend on various aspects. For example, the amount of light that is backscattered to the interface with theLEEs 3437 from thephosphor layer 3438 can depend on aspects of thephosphor layer 3438 and where the backscattered light impinges on the light input surface of thephosphor layer 3438. If the backscattered light impinges on theLEEs 3437 the amount of light that leaves thephosphor layer 3438 depends on the discontinuity of the refractive indices at the interface between theLEEs 3437 and thephosphor layer 3438, Backscattered light that impinges on thereflector layer 3452 is subject to absorption losses of thereflector layer 3452. Anadequate reflector layer 3452 absorbs substantially less light, typically just a few percent for reasonable reflector materials, than typical LEEs. As such, the lateral extension of thephosphor layer 3438 beyond the lateral extension of theLEEs 3437 in combination with the diffusion of light within thephosphor layer 3438 beyond the lateral extension of theLEEs 3437 in further combination with thereflector layer 3452 provides for an increased recycling rate of light from within thephosphor layer 3438 that impinges on thereflector layer 3452 in comparison to a system where thephosphor layer 3438 is restricted to cover the lateral extension of theLEEs 3437. Thus, with the described configuration a reduced portion of the light is scattered back to theLEEs 3437. Because LEEs generally absorb a significant part of the light that is returned back into the LEE, this configuration may significantly lower the amount of absorbed returned light (e.g., than white LEDs) due to the smaller portion of light scattered back to the LEEs. - If the
phosphor layer 3438 has isotropic and homogenous optical properties, light entering thephosphor layer 3438 may travel laterally as well as vertically about the same distance before it is output through the output surface of thephosphor layer 3438. Depending on the lateral extension of theLEEs 3437 and the effective thickness of thephosphor layer 3438 light scattered back into the LEE can be reduced in comparison to an LEE-air interface by approximately 20%. - Furthermore, the lateral light variation can be reduced. The reduction in lateral light variation can be achieved, for example, because the surface of the phosphor layer is larger than the LEE surface, and no collimation is present in the lateral direction. A remaining lateral variation of properties of light at the output surface of the
phosphor layer 3438 can depend on the lateral spacing between theLEEs 3437 and the effective thickness of thephosphor layer 3438.FIG. 34F shows an exampleasymmetric intensity profile 3440 at the exit of an optical coupler. An asymmetric beam distribution may be partially conserved by downstream (along the optical path) components of the optical system. Depending on the embodiment, light guides typically tend to equilibrate asymmetric beam distributions over certain optical path lengths but may at least partially conserve an asymmetric beam distribution if properly configured. This may be accomplished if the light guide is of sufficiently short length, for example. An asymmetric optical coupler may thus be utilized to generate an asymmetric intensity pattern, which may be employed in luminaires for asymmetric lighting applications, for example, for wall washing, track lighting or other applications. Furthermore, provided all other components of two luminaires are the same, asymmetrical optical couplers may cause light emission from the optical extractor that is broader than that from symmetrical optical couplers. As such asymmetric optical couplers may provide for tailoring of photometric output profiles for certain applications. - The submount for the LEEs may be off-perpendicular angle from the optical axis so that the normal axis of emission from the LEE is tilted from the nominal perpendicular direction in either of, or in combination, the altitudinal or azimuthal directions. The angle may be used to control the far-field emission from the optical couplers that translates into the intensity profile of the light emitted from an optical extractor.
- The width of the completed LEE strip (or LEE line source), including the
carrier 3434, may be up to one centimeter or more. In this example, the exit aperture of theoptical coupler 3422 substantially matches the width of the edge of the light guide, also referred to as the entrance aperture of the light guide. Such a configuration may be effective when the optical coupler and the light guide are integrally formed, or their alignment can be accurately determined during manufacture or assembly, for example. In some embodiments, the exit aperture of theoptical coupler 3422 is narrower than the entrance aperture of the light guide. Such a configuration may be effective when the optical coupler and the light guide are modularly formed and their alignment needs can be controlled via suitably accurate interconnect systems (not illustrated) to mitigate effects of misalignment. -
FIG. 35 shows an exploded view of thealuminum heat sink 3434, thesubstrate 3412 having a plurality of LEEs thereon, and a plurality ofoptical couplers 3422 which may be integrally formed as an optical coupler sheet orrow 3420. -
FIGS. 36A, 36B and 36D illustrate perspective views of example optical couplers.FIG. 36C illustrates a sectional view of anLEE strip 3412 includingoptical couplers 3422 ofFIGS. 36A and 36B . In general, optical couplers may have other configurations, for example, an optical coupler may be configured as a truncated cone or pyramid. Example truncated pyramid optical couplers may have a square or other cross section perpendicular to an optical axis. An optical coupler may have a circular, quadratic or other cross section at a receiving end and transition into a rectangular, circular or other cross section at an opposite end. Depending on the embodiment, such or other variations in profile may occur more than once along the length of an optical coupler. As illustrated inFIG. 36A , the exampleoptical couplers 3422 have areceiving opening 3442 within which theLEE chip 3437 or LEE package can be disposed. The receivingopening 3442 may be designed to maximize extraction efficiency out of theLEE chip 3437 or LEE package. The void between theLEE chip 3437 and the collimating optic may be filled with optical encapsulation material such as silicone to maximize light extraction efficiency. -
FIG. 36B shows anexample string 3421 ofoptical couplers 3422, also referred to as an elongate configuration ofoptical couplers 3422, for use in an LEE strip 3432. The string may be configured to provide collimation power in the direction of the LEE strip 3432 and perpendicular to it. Each of theoptical couplers 3422 may have equal or different collimation and/or other optical properties in such directions. An optical coupler may have continuous or discrete rotational symmetry perpendicular to its optical axis, or it may have no rotational symmetry with respect to the optical axis. For example, different collimation properties in different directions can be result of at least portions of the optical coupler having a rectilinear non-quadratic cross section perpendicular to the optical axis. Theoptical couplers 3422 may have interlocking mechanisms (not illustrated) configured to attach adjacentoptical couplers 3422 into thestring 3421. Such mechanisms may be resiliently releasable, allow interconnection into one or more rows of parallel strings (not illustrated) or otherwise configured, for example.Optical couplers 3422 and/or a string thereof may be formed through injection molding as separate optical couplers or in groups of connected optical couplers (up to the length of the luminaire). Depending on the embodiment, adjacent optical couplers in a string ofoptical couplers 3422 may be optically coupled with, or decoupled from one another to maintain transmission of light at the abutting interfaces between them below, at or above a predetermined level. Such configuration may depend on whether the optical couplers have a cavity or solid bulk configuration and whether they rely on total internal reflection and/or mirrored surfaces. It is noted that an optical coupler as illustrated inFIG. 36A may also be used individually in a rotationally symmetrical luminaire, for example, examples of which are discussed below. - As discussed previously, the optical couplers in an LEE string may be optically isolated or coupled to provide predetermined collimation of light within one or more planes parallel to the optical axes of the optical couplers. In some embodiments, adjacent optical couplers are optically coupled via suitable configuration of abutting interfaces, disposition of suitable material between adjacent optical couplers, integral formation or otherwise optically coupled. Optical decoupling may be achieved via disposition with formation of suitably sized gaps between individual optical couplers, or disposition of suitable reflective material such as films, layers, coatings or interjecting substances between or on abutting interfaces of adjacent optical couplers. Optical couplers may be integrally formed into lines or other groups (not illustrated) of adjacent optical couplers. Depending on the embodiment, a luminaire may include equal or different numbers of optical couplers within different groups of optical couplers.
-
FIG. 36D shows a linearoptical coupler 3444 configured to collimate substantially only in the direction perpendicular to the length of the LEE strip 3432. Theoptical coupler 3444 may be formed through extrusion to predetermined lengths. -
FIG. 36E shows an exemplary embodiment of anoptical coupler 3620 that includes multipleprimary optics 3421. Theoptical coupler 3620 can be used to achieve high collimation angles in a direction perpendicular to the elongation of the system of FWHM 20deg or better in the solid material, while it may be advantageous to keep a design wider beam angle of over 20 deg in the opposing direction. In some implementations, a configuration of theprimary optic 3620 can be tailored to provide batwing distribution in the direction of elongation of the system. In order to increase collimation in the direction perpendicular to the elongation of the system (e.g., to reduce divergence of the second angular range), acylindrical lens 3445 can be included as part of theprimary optics 3421 to add optical power at the entrance surface ofprimary optics 3421. In some embodiments, primary optics can be variable. For example, primary optics can be tunable lenses (e.g., available through variable electro-wetting or other means), which can change the second angular range to create a desired angular range of the light output as described herein. The tunable lenses can be used with high output LEEs and/or for a portion of the LEEs in the array. -
FIG. 36F shows a hollow embodiment of a primary optic 3630 (corresponding e.g. toprimary optics 1520 2120, 2920) configured to collect the light emitted by theLEEs 3438 and provide collimation and beam shaping to illuminate a secondary reflector. In this embodiment, theprimary optic 3630 has optical power perpendicular to the direction of alinear LED array 3438 only and provides beam shaping only in this direction. -
FIGS. 36G and 36H show other hollow embodiments ofprimary optics 3640 and 3650 (each of which can be used corresponding e.g. toprimary optics 1520 2120, 2920) configured to have identical or different optical powers in the direction of the linear LEE array and perpendicular to it. In some implementations, theprimary optic 3650 may have a rectangular cross section with dissimilar profile in the direction perpendicular and along the elongation of the hollow flux manifold. In one embodiment collimation of better than FWHM of 25deg perpendicular to the elongation of the flux manifold may be desired while collimation in elongation of the hollow flux manifold on the order of FWHM 40deg may be desired. - The hollow primary optics may optically communicate with each LEE individually (as in
FIGS. 36G and 36H ), or may optically communicate with all LEDs (as inFIG. 36F ) or a group of LEEs. - The profile of the hollow primary optic 3630 perpendicular to the beam direction may be linear (as in
FIG. 36F ), a linear array of rotational symmetric profiles (as inFIG. 36G ), a linear array of rectangular profiles (as inFIG. 36H ) or an array of other suitable profile. - The hollow primary optic may be reflectively coated with the coating applied to the side facing the source or to the side facing away from the source. The surface shape in direction of the emission may be linear, segmented linear, parabolic, hyperbolic, or any freeform shape suitable to the application.
- A perpendicular profile of a solid or hollow primary optic may be a two dimensional array of rectangular, triangular, rotational symmetric or other shape including individual rotational symmetric, rectangular, triangular or other profiles. The primary optic may be formed individually, in groups of six elements, for example, or may be formed integrally for the entire hollow flux manifold.
-
FIG. 36J shows a diagrammatic representation of an example of aluminaire 3660 including at least asubstrate 110, one ormore LEEs 112 disposed on thesubstrate 110, one or moreoptical couplers 120, anoptional light guide 3662, and an optical extractor 3666 (e.g., such asoptical extractors 140 or 1740). TheLEEs 112 emit light during operation in anangular range 115 with respect to a normal to thesubstrate 110.Optical couplers 120 receive light in theangular range 115 fromLEEs 112. Eachoptical coupler 120 is configured to redirect the light received in theangular range 115 into light with anangular range 125. The light with theangular range 125 can be directed into theoptional light guide 3662. If theoptional light guide 3662 is not part of theluminaire 3660, theoptical couplers 120 redirect the light with theangular range 125 into theoptical extractor 3666. - The
light guide 3662 can guide the light to a distal end of thelight guide 3662 away from -
LEEs 112. In some embodiments, thelight guide 3662 can be configured to allow a loss of light along its length, for example, which may scatter through at least a portion of one of the surfaces. For example, thelight guide 3662 can be configured to scatter light in angular ranges such as 3665-1, 3665-2, 3665-3, and/or 3665-4 as shown inFIG. 36J from within thelight guide 3662 to provide a desired illumination pattern. To cause the scattering of light, thelight guide 3662 can include scattering centers that are configured to scatter some of the light from within thelight guide 3662 through portions of the light guide surface, such as prisms, high reflectivity translucent contact points, or discontinuities in the light guide surfaces (e.g., holes), and other structures as known in the art within one or more portions of thelight guide 3662 and/or on surfaces of one or more portions of thelight guide 3662. The scattering centers can be disposed within the light guide or on the light guide surface. - The
light guide 3662 can provide at least a portion of the guided light at the distal end in anangular range 3664. In some embodiments, thelight guide 3662 can be shaped to guide the light received from theoptical couplers 120 in theangular range 125. -
Optical extractor 3666 receives light with theangular range 3664 that exits thelight guide 3662 or, when thelight guide 3662 is not part of theluminaire 3660, theoptical extractor 3666 receives the light with theangular range 125 provided by theoptical couplers 120.Optical extractor 3666 can include one or more reflective interfaces that reflect the light, which exits luminaire 3660 (indicated by arrows) with one or more output angular ranges, such asangular range 3668. The output angular range(s) at which light exits theluminaire 3660 depend, among other things, on the properties of optical extractor 3666 (e.g., geometry of the optical interfaces and optical properties of the materials forming the extractor). These properties can be tailored to provide extraction profiles desirable for specific lighting applications. - In some embodiments,
luminaire 3660 can include one or more optional tertiary optics, such as 150, positioned to receive at least some light output by theoptical extractor 3666. The optional secondary reflector(s) can redirect light received from theoptical extractor 3666 into angular ranges, such as 152 to provide a desired illumination pattern. For example, the tertiary optic can be configured to redirect light into a single direction, as shown bytertiary optic 150, or in several directions. -
FIG. 36K shows an example of aflexible light guide 3670. The flexible, also referred to as deformable, light guide 3760 can be pre-formed and/or deformable to direct light into a desired direction. For example, thelight guide 3670 can be deformable about a longitudinal extension of the light guide 3670 (e.g., about the y-axis) to effect a directional change of the light received with anangular range 125 to anangular range 3672 at the light output of thelight guide 3670. The angular range can include both, a range of angles within which the light is contained and a direction. Therefore, by deformation of the light guide, the angular range can be changed in angles within which the light is contained and/or a direction simultaneously. The angular range can be subject to a spatial divergence that may or may not be uniform in rotated angles and can include a particular peak intensity direction. In some embodiments, theflexible light guide 3670 can be a flexible solid light guide (e.g., deformable material) or include an angle rotator. - A light guide can also include two or more light guide elements.
FIGS. 36L-P show examples oflight guides 3680 including two light guide elements, 3882 and 3884 that are elongated along the y-axis and arranged adjacent each other. One or moreoptical couplers 120 can direct light into thelight guide 3680. In some embodiments, thelight guide elements angular ranges - The light guide can have various shapes to create a desired redirection of light that is received from one or more optical couplers in the second angular range, for example, to a third angular range different from the second angular range.
FIGS. 36Q-T show examples of various shapes of the light guide, such as 3610-1, 3610-2, 3610-3, and 3610-4. In these examples, the light guides are elongated along the y-axis as indicated inFIG. 36U . Light guide 3610-1 is shaped as a rectangular cuboid, where the area of surface A1 (light input surface) is substantially the same as the area of surface A2 (light output surface) at the opposite side of the light guide. Light guides 3610-2 and 3610-4 are shaped as trapezoids, where the area of surface A1 (light input surface) is different than the area of surface A2 (light output surface) at the opposite side of the light guide. For example, for the light guide 3610-2, the area of surface A1 is larger than the area of surface A2, and for the light guide 3610-4, the area of surface A1 is smaller than the area of surface A2. Light guide 3610-3 includes discontinuities in a surface along the longitudinal dimension of the light guide, e.g., along the z-axis. In this example, a sum of the areas of the discontinuous surfaces A1-1, A1-2, A1-3, and A1-4 is smaller than the area of surface A2 at the opposite side of the light guide. In some embodiments, the surfaces A1-1, A1-2, A1-3, and A1-4 can be the light input surface and the surface A2 can be the light output surface, in some embodiments, the surface A2 can be the light input surface and surfaces A1-1, A1-2, A1-3, and A1-4 can be the light output surfaces of the light guide. The shape of the light guide can allow for variation of the light properties (e.g., angular ranges) along a longitudinal dimension of the light guide. - An optical extractor (e.g.,
optical extractor 140 represented diagrammatically inFIG. 1 ) can include multiple optical extractor elements along a longitudinal extension of the luminaire (e.g., along the y-axis, in planes perpendicular to a side surface of a light guide 130), for example. Some of these optical extractor elements create a strong forward (“downlight”) component along the same longitudinal axis of the luminaire, e.g., the z-axis, as the backward (“uplight” or “sidelight”) components. -
FIG. 36U shows an example of aluminaire module 3690 with an optical extractor that includesoptical extractor elements luminaire module 3690 can further include one or moreoptical couplers 120 and an optionallight guide 130. In this example,optical elements optical couplers 120 can be directed into theoptical extractor elements light guide 130, or directly without light guide. Theoptical extractor elements FIGS. 2A-2G . Theoptical extractor element 3692 can redirect light received by theoptional guide 130 or directly by theoptical couplers 120 and output the redirected light inangular ranges optical extractor element 3694 can redirect and output the received light inangular ranges light guide 130, thelight guide 130 can output light in anangular range 3698 at the area of the gap between theoptical extractor elements light guide 130 can include a reflective or absorptive surface at the surface between theoptical extractor elements - Aspects of embodiments of luminaires as described herein, can apply to luminaires that extend along a longitudinal luminaire direction, whether straight or curved, and may also apply to other configurations. For example, many of the design principles described above can be applied to luminaires that are rotationally symmetric about the z-axis.
FIGS. 37-40 each illustrate example luminaires that display this symmetry. Each example luminaire includes anoptical coupler 3477, alight guide 3478 and anoptical extractor 3480, which are integrally formed into a solid body that can reflect light via TIR. The integral formation is achieved by injection molding. Each example luminaire also includes aLEE module 3476 and a secondary reflector. Thelight guide 3478 may also be referred to as a light pipe. -
FIG. 37 illustrates a perspective view of theLEE module 3476 optically coupled to theoptical coupler 3477 to receive light from one or more LEEs included in theLEE module 3476. TheLEE module 3476 includes one or more LEEs (e.g., LED chips) mounted on a substrate (submount). The LEEs are configured to emit light in a first angular range with respect to a normal to the substrate, e.g., the z-axis. - The
optical coupler 3477 is configured to redirect light received from the one or more LEEs in the first angular range, and provide the redirected light in a second angular range at an output end of theoptical coupler 3477, such that a divergence of the second angular range is smaller than a divergence of the first angular range. For instance, theoptical coupler 3477 can be configured to collimate light to narrower than +/−40 degrees to satisfy TIR requirements along a longitudinal extension (along the z-axis) of thecylindrical light guide 3478, as shown inFIG. 38A , or of theprismatic light guide 3478′ with N facets, as shown inFIG. 38B . Theoptical coupler 3477 has a receiving pocket (other examples can have two or more) that allows positioning of theLEE module 3476. The receiving pocket can be designed to provide predetermined light transfer from the LEE(s) into theoptical coupler 3477 for one or more LEEs. The space between theoptical coupler 3477 and the LEE(s) may be filled with silicone or other suitable substance to improve optical coupling. Theoptical coupler 3477 may have a cylindrical circumference. In other examples, it may have a polygonal shape, an elliptical shape, or other shape. The polygon has N sides, where N can be 3 for triangular shape, 4 for square shape, 5 for pentagonal shape, 6 for hexagonal shape; N can also be 7 or larger for other polygonal shapes. The exit aperture of theoptical coupler 3477 is designed to provide good transfer of light from theoptical coupler 3477 into the light guides 3478, 3478′. The outside of theoptical coupler 3477 may be coated, which may affect whether light within the optical coupler is reflected by TIR or specular reflection. - In some embodiments, one or more of the LEEs may be configured to emit one or more of blue, violet or ultraviolet light which may be converted, at least in part, with one or more phosphors to generate white light, for example. Phosphors may be disposed in different locations of the luminaire, for example, in the
LEE module 3476, proximate or distant of the LEE chips. For example, the size of the submount can be about 1 cm by 1 cm. Theoptical coupler 3477 has a substantially circular cross section perpendicular to its optical axis with a receiving end allowing the insertion of at least a portion of theLEE module 3476 into theoptical coupler 3477 in order to achieve good light extraction from theLEE module 3476. - The
light guide optical coupler 3477 and is shaped to guide light received from theoptical coupler 3477 in the second angular range to an output end of the light guide, and to provide the guided light in substantially the same second angular range at the output end of the light guide. In the example illustrated inFIG. 38A , across-section 3810 perpendicular to an optical axis of the light guide 3478 (e.g., the z-axis) forms a circle. In the example illustrated inFIG. 38B , across-section 3820 perpendicular to an optical axis of thelight guide 3478′ (e.g., the z-axis) forms a polygon with N sides, where N>3. In some implementations, the polygon ofcross-section 3820 is a regular polygon. In some implementations, the number, N, of facets of theprismatic light guide 3478 is selected to be larger than a threshold number of facets, N>No. The threshold No depends on (i) a transverse dimension of theprismatic guide 3478′ (in a cross sectional plane perpendicular to the z-axis), and an index of refraction of thelight guide 3478′. The threshold number of facets represents a number of facets No for which an angle between adjacent facets of theprismatic light guide 3478′ is such that light propagating in a cross section perpendicular to the optical axis z cannot undergo TIR. - In some implementations, the number, N, of facets of the
prismatic light guide 3478′ is selected such that theprismatic light guide 3478 has no parallel facets. In some implementations, the number of facets, N, of theprismatic light guide 3478 is to be an odd number. In the latter implementations, development of transverse modes in theprismatic light guide 3478′ can be avoided. In general, theprismatic light guide 3478′ can blur otherwise occurring hot spots from bright LEEs. - The
optical extractor 3480 is optically coupled with the output end of thelight guide optical extractor 3480 to receive light from thelight guide optical extractor 3480 has a redirecting surface spaced from the input end of theoptical extractor 3480 and an output surface. The redirecting surface has an apex facing the input end of theoptical extractor 3480 and is shaped to reflect light received at the input end of theoptical extractor 3480 in the second angular range and provide the reflected light in a third angular range towards the output surface. The output surface is shaped to refract the light provided by the redirecting surface in the third angular range as refracted light and to output the refracted light in a fourth angular range outside the output surface of theoptical extractor 3480. Theoptical extractor 3480 is substantially rotationally symmetric about the optical axis (e.g., the z-axis) of thelight pipe - As such, the
optical extractor 3480 provides a substantially rotationally symmetric intensity distribution. It is noted, that this may be different in other examples. Light can be output from theoptical extractor 3480 into 360 degrees outward away from theoptical extractor 3480 and a portion of that light back toward a notional plane perpendicular to the optical axis through theLEE module 3476. The intensity distribution of the light output from theoptical extractor 3480 generally resembles a portion of the light emission of a point-like light source. - The light that is output by the
optical extractor 3480 is further redirected and shaped in the example luminaires by a respective secondary reflector to provide predetermined intensity distributions. Optical surfaces and/or interfaces of theoptical extractor 3480 and/or the secondary reflector can include one or more parabolic, hyperbolic, spherical, aspherical, facetted, segmented, polygonal, or otherwise shaped portions, as described herein in connection withFIGS. 2A-2G , for example. - In this example, the
optical extractor 3480 is shaped in a continuous rotationally symmetrical manner and can create substantially symmetrical radiation patterns. In other examples, theoptical extractor 3480 can have a finite number of discrete regular repeating patterns or facets, which can be used, for example, to create an appearance associated with facetted glass or other transparent material or to blur otherwise occurring hot spots from bright light sources. The reflective interface of theoptical extractor 3480 may additionally be coated with a suitably thick layer of silver or other metal such that no light can escape there through. Such a coating may change the nature of the reflection of light inside theoptical extractor 3480 from TIR to specular reflection. -
FIG. 39 is a perspective view of thelight guide 3478 and areflector 3482 for redirecting and shaping the light output by theoptical extractor 3480 toward the surface to be illuminated. The secondary reflector has rotational symmetry about the optical axis (e.g., the z-axis) and is shaped to reflect at least some of the light output by the output surface of theoptical extractor 3480 in the fourth angular range as reflected light, and to provide the reflected light in a fifth angular range, such that the fifth angular range is different than the fourth angular range. Thereflector 3482 may have any shape for creating the desired intensity distribution from light it receives from theoptical extractor 3480, e.g., parabolic. In some implementations, thereflector 3482 may have an irregular surface, have peened indentations, facets, grooves, or other optically active structures that could provide additional control over beam shaping, color mixing and/or homogenization, for example as may be desired for functional or decorative purposes. - The
reflector 3482 can include a reflective metal, such as aluminum or silver, or a material coated with a reflective film, for example Alanod's Miro™ or 3M's Vikuiti™. The luminaire ofFIG. 34 may find application as a replacement luminaire for MR16, GU10, PAR20, PAR30, PAR 38, AR111, or similar luminaires, or may be configured and assembled in a light fixture creating a pendant light, a down light, a track light or a desk luminaire. Thereflector 3482 may be configured to allow some light to escape via holes (not illustrated) provided in thereflector 3482, for example to illuminate a ceiling. - In one embodiment, the
reflector 3482 reflects substantially all light emitted from theoptical extractor 3480. The shape of thereflector 3482 may be designed to uniformly illuminate a target surface. Thereflector 3482 may also be adjustable relative to theoptical extractor 3480. For example, the luminaire may be configured to permit such adjustment in the field or during manufacturing to modify the beam characteristics of the luminaire. Thereflector 3482 may also exhibit non-rotational symmetry with the ability to be field rotatable to steer the beam distribution in the illumination region. -
FIG. 40 illustrates a perspective view of an example luminaire similar to the one ofFIG. 39 . The luminaire includes a light guide (3478 or 3478′) and areflector 3488 for reflecting the light toward a target surface. This example luminaire utilizes areflector 3488 with a facettedreflective surface 3490. The facettedreflective surface 3490 includes a plurality of substantially planar segments. Furthermore, thereflector 3488 can include acylindrical side sleeve 3489. - In some embodiments, one or more light-exit surfaces are optically coupled with one or more reflective interfaces in a spherical Weierstrass configuration. For example, the
optical extractor 3480 is formed of a material with refractive index n and includes at least one light-exit surface that is configured as a portion of a sphere of radius R that is disposed so that at least a first portion of an optically coupled reflective interface lies within a portion of space defined by a notional sphere of radius R/n that is concentric with the sphere of radius R that defines the light-exit surface and reflects light from the light guide thereto. In such a case, light coming from the light guide (3478 or 3478′) that is reflected by a first portion of the reflective interface into a solid angle defined by a light-exit surface relative to a corresponding reflective interface can exit through the light-exit surface without undergoing total internal reflection. - Additional examples of luminaires configured to provide a rotationally symmetric intensity profile are described below in this specification in connection with
FIGS. 45A-49C . - Luminaires can be used in an upright configuration where the LEE is positioned underneath the optical extractor. For example,
FIG. 41 shows a cross-section of anexemplary luminaire 4100 configured for use as a desk lamp or pedestal lamp. Theluminaire 4100 includes alight guide 4120, anoptical extractor 4126, acarrier 4134, one or moreoptical couplers 4137, and one ormore LEE modules 4135 on one or more submounts 4138. Theluminaire 4100 further includes abase 4130.Example light rays 4122 from theLEE modules 4135 are shown propagating in thelight guide 4120. Thesubmounts 4138 and thecarrier 4134 are thermally coupled and may be configured as a heat sink in combination with thebase 4130. TheLEEs 4132 of the LEE module 4135 (seeFIG. 42 ) may be interconnected in series and/or parallel as determined for operative connection with suitable circuitry for driving theLEEs 4132. - The
optical extractor 4126 reflects the light downward and outward by a specular reflective coating as indicated by arrows. Theluminaire 4100 may optionally include a secondary reflector (not illustrated) disposed and suitably configured to at least partially surround theoptical extractor 4126. In this example, such a secondary reflector may be disposed to surround theoptical extractor 4126 from above so that light that is emitted upward from theoptical extractor 4126 can be redirected downward towards a target surface. Thebase 4130 can include a switch, dimmer, heat sink or other components. Thebase 4130 may be configured to provide predetermined thermal coupling to the environment and may be used as a heat sink, for example. -
Luminaire 4100 can have an elongate or rotationally symmetrical configuration with respect to a plane perpendicular to the optical axis/axes of the light guide, which is an elongation perpendicular to the plane of the illustration ofFIG. 41 or a rotational symmetry about an optical axis in the plane of illustration. Accordingly, for example, thecarrier 4134, theoptical coupler 4137 and/or thesubmount 4138 may be elongate and include a plurality ofLEE modules 4135 along their length, or be substantially quadratic, circular or otherwise point-like and include one or a cluster ofLEE modules 4135. As such, theexample luminaire 4100 can include a plurality (not illustrated) ofLEE modules 4135 arranged in an elongate or clustered configuration, for example.FIG. 42 shows a top view of anexample LEE module 4135 including an example configuration ofLEEs 4132. The one ormore LEE modules 4135 are operatively disposed on the one or more submounts 4138. - In general, the luminaires described herein may be manufactured using a variety of techniques. Manufacturing of luminaires, including the disposition of LEE dies or packages, may be facilitated by employing circuit board assembly techniques and placement machinery processes in combination with one or more processes as described herein. LEE dies or packages may be disposed relative to the optical couplers with predetermined accuracy, for example during manufacture, assembly, installation in the field or other event. Differential coefficients of thermal expansion between different materials may be considered during such deposition, for example, if components are manufactured or assembled at different temperatures.
- For example,
FIG. 43 shows of how LEE strips may be formed. Threelayers substrate 4312 including a printed circuit board (PCB) panel, or other suitable support layer may be configured to provide predetermined electrical, mechanical and thermal properties and interconnect functionalities. The substrate includes pairs ofmetal pads 4314 for each LEE chip and a suitable conductive interconnect systems for interconnecting the LEEs of a strip in a combination of series and parallel circuitry to be driven by a power supply. The power supply for each LEE strip or combination of LEE strips may be mounted on thesubstrate 4312 or may be a separate module connected to the strip or strips by a suitable connector. Depending on the embodiment, thesubstrate 4312 may include a metal core, epoxy or other PCB that can provide predetermined vertical and horizontal heat dissipation characteristics.Segmentation lines 4316 are shown where thesubstrate 4312 will be singulated to form the strips. - Optical couplers can be disposed in an
optical coupler sheet 4320, which can be a molded sheet, such as plastic, forming an array ofoptical couplers 4322. Thesheet 4320 may be coated with a reflective film.Segmentation lines 4324 are shown. Each LEE is positioned in anoptical coupler 4322 to ensure light is effectively injected into a light guide. Theoptical couplers 4322 may include one or more optical elements including non-imaging dielectric TIR concentrators, such as CPC (compound parabolic concentrators), CECs (compound elliptical concentrators), CHC (compound hyperbolic concentrators), tapered, or untapered, light pipes, segmented concentrators, other geometry concentrators, one or more lenses or other optical elements, for example. Depending on the embodiment, theoptical couplers 4322 may be nominally equal or have different configurations. For example, optical couplers may have different profiles in the direction of the luminaire and/or perpendicular to the luminaire. For example, theoptical couplers 4322 may be rotationally symmetric, or have elliptical triangular, square, hexagonal, or multi-segment cross-sections perpendicular to the beam direction. - The
optical couplers 4322 may be integrally formed or configured from solid transparent material and solely rely on TIR or may be partially or fully reflectively coated on one or more surfaces. Optical couplers also may be hollow, or reflectively coated and/or non-imaging. Hollow reflectors can have the benefit of a shortened length over a dielectric collimating optic for the same collimation angle. - If corresponding LEEs are employed in the luminaire, a
phosphor sheet 4328 may be used to convert blue or ultraviolet pump light and produce white light in combination with the unconverted pump light, if any. The characteristics of thephosphor sheet 4328 may be varied depending on the peak wavelength of the LEEs, the desired correlated color temperature (CCT) or spectral power distribution of the light, and other factors.Segmentation lines 4330 are shown. Thephosphor sheet 4328 is segmented into strips or plates that are disposed in proximity to the top surfaces of the LEE chips. Thephosphor sheet 4328 also may include three-dimensional structures (e.g., hemispherical plates) and positioned in proximity to the LEE chips within theoptical couplers 4322 to reduce high temperature effects on the phosphor. - The electrodes of bare LEE chips, or the electrodes of submounts on which the bare LEE chips are mounted, are operatively disposed to the
PCB pads 4314. Operative disposition may be performed by ultrasonic bonding, gluing, gluing with conductive adhesive, soldering, wire bonding, ball bumping and/or other operative interconnection. The LEEs may be flip chips, vertical chips (using a wire bond for the top LEE electrode), horizontal non-flip with wirebonding to anode and cathode, or other type of chip. - The
substrate 4312,optical coupler sheet 4320, andphosphor sheet 4328 may be separated by sawing, routing, perforating, snapping, etching or otherwise, for example. The separation may be facilitated via predetermined breaking lines, also referred to as singulation lines, for example. The resulting strips/plates may be combined with a suitable carrier to form an LEE strip as shown inFIGS. 34A-34C , for example. - In some embodiments, optical couplers may be manufactured, for example injection molded, in groups of two or more elements and be provided with integral registration elements or receptacles for matingly receiving external registration elements to assure accurate placement of optical couplers relative to suitably disposed LEEs. Registration elements may be configured as indexing pins for insertion into respective holes inside a PCB board or LEE package, for example. Index matching material such as silicone with suitable optical properties may be disposed to provide a predetermined optical coupling between LEEs and the optical couplers. LEE packages may be operatively connected at different stages of the noted process to the optical couplers. Depending on the embodiment, LEE packages may be electrically and/or mechanically disposed on a PCB before or after operative interconnection with the optical couplers.
- Optical couplers may be configured to provide one or more receiving apertures, which may be configured to provide tapered inner walls, protrusions, ribs or other elements that provide a predetermined restorative force to the LEEs during the mating procedure so that LEEs and optical couplers can be aligned with predetermined accuracy.
- LEEs may be placed within recesses provided by optical couplers by automated equipment and centered by tapered walls or ribs to centered positions with a surrounding layer of gel to index match and optionally be cured to set their positions. An optional processing step may then planarize the assembly and remove excess material in preparation for testing and subsequent electrical and mechanical bonding to a substrate.
- In certain embodiments, LEEs may be molded within the optical couplers to form assemblies which then can be optionally tested as a unit and sorted according to certain properties and then can be aligned to a registration point on the substrate prior to electrical and thermal bonding. A tab or pin on the optical coupler body may be employed that is aligned to the substrate matching detail which also aligns the electrical contact points of the LEEs in the x, y and z axes for electrical and thermal bonding.
- LEEs may be affixed, molded or otherwise operatively coupled with the optical couplers. Furthermore, LEEs may be held in place by mating structures in one or more directions by a registration detail in the input side of the light guide. This may be performed prior to the curing of an optical interface material, which may be used to reduce Fresnel losses at the generated interface. Such steps may help constrain alignment of the electrical contact points at the bottom of the LEE die or packages to align to a substrate for electrical and thermal bonding.
- In some embodiments, the LEEs are mounted on a substrate via an adhesive thermal matching gel with a viscous solder paste between their contacts and the substrate such that they can be adjusted minute distances as they are centered within their respective mating recesses within the optical couplers.
- Components of luminaires can be made modularly and designed to be assembled in interchangeable ways. For example,
FIG. 44A shows how anoptical extractor 3870 may be modularly configured separately from alight guide 3872. Thelight guide 3872 includes an input end 231 (in this example the top edge of the rectangular light guide 3872) and an output end 232 (in this example the bottom edge of the rectangular light guide 3872). Theoptical extractor 3870 includes aninput end 232′. Theinput end 232′ of theoptical extractor 3870 may be affixed to the output end (bottom edge) 232 of therectangular light guide 3872 employing a suitably optically transparent coupling material having a matched index of refraction such as silicone. Theoptical extractor 3870 may be held in place by the coupling material, mechanical interference, a friction fit or otherwise, for example. This configuration may be employed to permit choosing from a selection of differently configured optical extractors that provide different intensity distributions better suited for a particular lighting application. Theoptical extractor 3870 may also be provided with a variety of distribution optics so that they can be joined to acommon light guide 3872 in a completely modular fashion to suit the mounting height and lighting requirements of the space. -
FIG. 44B shows an example of amodular luminaire module 4420. In this example, theluminaire module 4420 includes substrates 4422-1, 4422-2, and 4422-3, on which LEEs are disposed, optical couplers 4424-1, 4424-2, and 4424-3, light guides 4426-1 and 4426-2, and optical extractors 4428-1 and 4428-2. The optical couplers 4424-1, 4424-2, and 4424-3 can be coupled with the substrates 4422-1, 4422-2, and 4422-3 respectively. The light guides 4426-1 and 4426-2 can be coupled with the optical couplers. For example, light guide 4426-1 can be coupled with optical coupler 4424-1 and light guide 4426-2 can be coupled with optical couplers 4424-2 and 4424-3. The optical extractors 4428-1 and 4428-2 can be coupled with the light guide(s). For example, optical extractors 4428-1 and 4428-2 can be coupled with the light guide 4426-2. The configuration of themodular luminaire module 4420 can be modified to provide a desired illumination pattern. For example, different combinations of substrates, optical couplers, light guides, and/or optical extractors can provide different illumination patterns and physical dimensions to adapt the luminaire to specific lighting and space requirements. - Multiple components of a luminaire can be integrally formed. In other words, two or more optical components of a luminaire can be formed from as single piece of optical material. Integrally formed components can limit Fresnel losses that occur at optical interfaces where refractive indices of adjacent optical materials are mismatched. Integral formation can facilitate registration and alignment of respective components of a luminaire.
-
FIG. 44C shows an example of an integrally formedluminaire module 4430. The light guide can be integrally formed with the optical couplers and/or the optical extractor. In this example, theluminaire module 4430 includes at least onesubstrate 110, one ormore LEEs 112 disposed on thesubstrate 110, and an integrally formedportion 4435 that includes an optical coupler, a light guide, and an optical extractor. Depending on the complexity of its shape, the integrally formedluminaire module 4430 may be manufactured by single or multi-shot molding, extrusion or other process, for example. - Optical components of luminaire may be configured to sustain exposure to predetermined amounts of short wavelength light, for example blue, violet or ultraviolet light. Depending on the embodiment, such light may propagate through substantial portions of a luminaire. Exposure of respective components may depend on the particular locations of phosphors. Respective components may be formed of suitably resistant materials. Likewise, components that assume high temperatures during operation of the luminaire be configured to provide predetermined heat resistance and resilience against mechanical stresses caused by thermal gradients and/or differential thermal expansion between different components. Wavelength-conversion materials and LEEs can assume high operating temperatures.
- Wavelength-conversion materials may be disposed in different amounts, concentrations and/or net conversion capabilities at different locations. Depending on the embodiment, the luminaire may be configured to emit light of uniform or non-uniform chromaticity or CCT (correlated color temperature) and/or emit light that is uniform or non-uniform within predetermined solid-angles. Luminaires with respective intensity distributions may be configured for decorative and/or general illumination. As such, wavelength-conversion materials may be arranged also to provide predetermined appearances and intensity distributions, for example. Depending on the embodiment, the luminaire may be configured so that light from different LEEs may be optically coupled with different wavelength-conversion materials. The LEEs may be operatively configured to allow independent control of different LEEs and as such allow control of how much light may be converted by different wavelength-conversion materials. Depending on the embodiment, the light generated by the different wavelength-conversion materials in response to illumination by the different LEEs may be completely, partially or substantially not mixed, for example. Depending on the degree of mixing, the luminaire may be configured to provide controllable intensity distributions or control over the chromaticity and/or CCT of the emitted light.
- In general, the LEEs are arranged on one or more substrates. Each substrate may have a non-elongate, elongate or other shape. One or more substrates may be disposed on a carrier, for example a strip, disk, tile or otherwise shaped carrier configured to provide mechanical, electrical, thermal and/or optical coupling to respective elements including the ambient, the light guide, optional secondary reflector or other component of the luminaire. The carrier may be configured to provide predetermined mechanical strength, interconnectivity, heat sinking, electrical connection or other functions. Depending on the embodiment, the carrier may be configured to dissipate heat away from LEEs directly or indirectly into the ambient. The secondary reflector may be designed to be in thermal contact with the carrier and provide a large surface area enabling thermal dissipation of the waste heat generated in the LEEs.
- Generally, luminaires are configured for suspension from and/or recess in a ceiling, wall or other surface of an object, room, or other space. In such a case, the light guide may be disposed substantially vertically, horizontally or other direction with light inside the light guide substantially propagating downwards, sideways or other respective direction. Corresponding luminaires may be rotationally symmetrical about an optical axis or elongate. Elongate luminaire may be configured in predetermined lengths of about two, four or six feet long, for example. Corresponding luminaire may be configured as replacements to fluorescent tubes, recessed or suspended troffers, or provided in other configurations, for example. According to some embodiments, the luminaire is configured as a rotationally symmetric luminaire such as a lamp or light bulb, or other non-elongate luminaire. According to some embodiments, the luminaire is configured as a toroidal tube, which may be considered both elongate and rotationally symmetrical.
- To provide an example luminaire with approximately 5000 lm light output to replace a 2×4 foot fluorescent fixture, about 50 lW LEE chips, which may be packaged, chip-on-board, or otherwise configured high-illuminance LEE chips need to be operatively disposed substantially equidistantly along a four foot LEE strip. In this case the average distance between the LEE chips, also referred to as pitch, amounts to about 24 mm. Accordingly, a luminaire configured to replace a
typical fluorescent 2 foot by 2 foot troffer needs to generate about 3000 lumens, with a commensurate type or number of LEE chips. For example, LED dies of about 12-14 mil can be used for task or troffer luminaires, and LED dies of about 40-60 mil can be used for garage and suspended luminaires. As another example, the number of LEE chips required depends on the luminous flux requirement of the system, the system's optical efficiency, and the performance of the employed LEE. If more light output from the luminaire is required, the LEE chips may be disposed more densely in two or more parallel rows of LEE strips or otherwise grouped. - Depending on the embodiment, such groupings of LEEs may determine altered geometries and dimensions of the optical coupler, light guide, optical extractor and/or other components of a luminaire. It is important to mix the light from the LEE chips to obtain good illuminance and color uniformity along the length of the light fixture.
- According to another example, a luminaire of approximately 1200 mm length is configured with approximately 100 medium flux LEEs (such as Nichia NS2L-157 devices) to provide approximately 5000 lumens (lm) of luminous flux. Those devices can be placed on a single PCB strip at a spacing of about 12 mm. Such or other luminaires described herein may be configured for suspension from a ceiling.
- According to another example, a luminaire is configured as a replacement for a 2 foot or 4 foot long fluorescent tube. The luminaire can have a suitable length for placement in the housing of a two feet by two feet or two feet by four feet troffer. In order to provide the flux of a 4 feet long fluorescent lamp of about 3000 lm, approximately 30 LEEs, for example 1 mm by 1 mm LEEs of 100 lm each, may be used spaced apart at approximately 40 mm per luminaire.
- A luminaire according to an embodiment may be configured to replace a 2-foot by 2-foot troffer. In such a luminaire the LEEs may be disposed in two rows each having a length of about 600 mm. Each row can then be coupled with an elongate system as described herein. To be able to provide for example 1500 lm output from each row, a certain number of LEEs per row is required with each row having LEEs spaced at a predetermined distance, for example. Nominally, for example, 30 LEEs with a light output of 50 lm each spaced at 20 mm per row may provide 1500 lm light input into the optical system of each row. Considering inefficiencies due to optical, electrical, ageing and other effects, for example, about 30% to about 100% more light input per row may be required to account for such inefficiencies and achieve and maintain a light output of about 1500 lm per row. Consequently, a corresponding example luminaire may be configured with 60 LEEs, each providing 50 lm, spaced at 10 mm per row.
- It is noted that the specific number of LEEs used in such a luminaire may depend on ageing properties of the LEEs and the degree to which an LEE drive system can compensate for such properties. Ageing properties of LEEs can include decrease and/or increase of LEE efficacy, light output, efficacy, and probability of failure and/or other properties that can vary with time of operation of an LEE. Such luminaires need to be used in combination with compatible LEE electrical drive systems in order to be able to maintain the overall flux provided by the luminaire within desired tolerances.
- The example luminaire may be configured as a desk, pedestal or other luminaire, for example. The example luminaire also may be configured as a replacement for a fluorescent tube, or more specifically a modular combination of a fluorescent tube and a pair of respective T5, T8 or other fluorescent tube receiver sockets. In such an example luminaire the base can form a replacement for a pair of tube receiver sockets as usually used to releasably connect a fluorescent tube via inserting contacts of the fluorescent tube and turning the fluorescent tube until it locks the contacts via a suitable electromechanical mechanism to establish an operative connection between the fluorescent tube and the fixture. Such fixtures can be configured as troffers, cove or other types of luminaires. In contrast to the modular combination of a fluorescent tube with a pair of tube receiver sockets, the example luminaire can be integrally formed. Luminaires according to this example may be configured for operative coupling with a suitable fixture in a modular or integral fashion.
- Further to the foregoing described embodiments,
FIGS. 45A-49C show ahollow luminaire 4500 that is designed to provide a rotationally symmetric intensity profile.Luminaire 4500 includes ahousing 4512 with a cooler 4517, acluster 4510 of LEEs and acollector 4520.Luminaire 4500 may be referred to as a down light.Collector 4520 is a hollow element that includes tapered surfaces extending aroundcluster 4510. Afirst reflector 4530 is positioned in the path of light emitted from the LEEs and collimated bycollector 4520.First reflector 4530 includes a conical,reflective surface 4532 having a v-shaped cross section.Luminaire 4500 has a rotational symmetry axis, which insects the apex of the conical,reflective surface 4532 of thefirst reflector 4530.Luminaire 4500 further includes a rotationally symmetricsecondary reflector 4540 positioned to receive light reflected fromfirst reflector 4530 and redirect the light to the target surface through awindow 4539. Thewindow 4539 may be transparent, translucent or otherwise configured. Thesecondary reflector 4540 has a convex profile. First reflector is attached towindow 4539. Mounting elements secure andposition window 4539 and therebyfirst reflector 4530 relative tosecondary reflector 4540 at a specified distance from the LEEs and thecollector 4520. -
FIG. 46A illustrates a perspective view of thesecondary reflector 4540.FIG. 46B illustrates a perspective view of asecondary reflector element 4541 of thesecondary reflector 4540. Thesecondary reflector 4540 includes twelvesecondary reflector elements 4541. Thesecondary reflector 4540 may be formed as a whole or from a number of elements by drawing, welding, soldering or other process of suitable metallic, plastic or other materials.FIG. 47 illustrates a perspective view of one of manyalternative forms 4547 of a secondary reflector for theluminaire 4500. In contrast to thesecondary reflector 4540, which has discrete rotational symmetry, the secondary reflector ofFIG. 47 has continuous rotational symmetry about its optical axis. - The optical components of
luminaire 4500 can be produced from a variety of materials. For example, the components can be produced from a metal, such as aluminum, or from a plastic coated with a reflective material. - In general, the intensity distribution provided by
luminaire 4500 depends, inter alfa, on the geometry ofcollector 4500, the geometry offirst reflector 4530 andsecondary reflector 4540, and distances between components of theluminaire 4500, and these parameters can be varied as desired to provide an intensity distribution suitable for the luminaire' s intended purpose. For example, the angular width of lobes in the intensity distribution in cross-section depends on the degree of collimation provided bycollector 4520 and the amount by whichreflectors FIG. 48 at least in part depends on the configuration of and relative orientation of the reflective surfaces. In this plot, 0° corresponds to the positive z-direction. -
FIGS. 49A-49C illustrate plots of the simulated intensity distribution that is generated by theluminaire 4500. Depending on the specific configuration, such a luminaire may be useful for various applications including commercial or residential lighting.FIG. 49A shows a contour plot of the illuminance across the work surface,FIG. 49B shows a plot of illuminance (in lux) vs. Y position (in mm) at X=0, andFIG. 49C shows a plot of illuminance (in lux) vs. X position. Luminaire systems can include an extended source, e.g., a light bulb or a tube, a reflector and housing—such as fluorescent troffer or pendant. The source can provide a raw flux source, while the reflector and housing can provide a system for supporting, conditioning, and redirecting light flux from the source to the work surface. These fixtures are powered directly from line voltage—such as in the case of a desk lamp—or a power transforming ballast as in the case of a fluorescent ceiling troffer. - Devices described in this specification may be configured to use light flux originating from a primary source of known dimensional, geometric, brightness and uniformity characteristics, and a secondary reflector/refractor/combination optic to output a specified radiation pattern. The secondary optic can redistribute the source flux's “phase-space” to a new phase-space of prescribed dimensional extent and angular divergence (e.g., directional cosines) while maintaining a substantially uniform intensity from the secondary optic. These devices can provide uniform illumination of the work surface, efficient energy conversion from the light source of the devices to the work surface, and uniform and/or glare-free intensity from the fixture itself when viewed from the work surface. Additionally, these devices can provide glare-free intensity characteristics while maintaining efficiency and directionality in flux redirection.
- Other embodiments are in the following claims.
Claims (21)
1-47. (canceled)
48. A light fixture, comprising:
an array of light emitting diodes (LEDs), the array extending along a first direction and the LEDs being arranged to emit light along an axis orthogonal to the first direction; and
a light guide module having an input surface extending along the first direction and facing the array of LEDs, the light guide module comprising a first light guide and a second light guide,
wherein the first light guide extends along the first direction and is configured to guide at least some of the light received by the light guide module at the input surface in a second direction orthogonal to the first direction, and
the second light guide extends along the first direction and is configured to guide at least some of the light received by the light guide module at the input surface in a third direction orthogonal to the first direction and non-parallel to the second direction.
49. The light fixture of claim 48 , wherein the first light guide has an edge extending along the first direction opposite the input surface.
50. The light fixture of claim 49 , wherein the second light guide has an edge extending along the first direction opposite the input surface, the edge of the second light guide being spatially displaced from the edge of the first light guide.
51. The light fixture of claim 50 , wherein the edges of the first and second light guides are equidistant from the input surface.
52. The light fixture of claim 48 , wherein at least some of the light coupled into the light guide module at the input surface propagates within the first light guide due to total internal reflection at a side surface of the first light guide.
53. The light fixture of claim 52 , wherein at least some of the light coupled into the light guide module at the input surface propagates within the second light guide due to total internal reflection at a side surface of the second light guide.
54. The light fixture of claim 48 , wherein, in cross section, the light guide module is v-shaped, the input surface being located at the apex of the v-shape.
55. The light fixture of claim 48 , wherein the array is a one-dimensional array.
56. The light fixture of claim 48 , wherein the first and second light guides have a substantially constant thickness along their respective light guide directions.
57. The light fixture of claim 48 , wherein the light guide module comprises one or more depressions at the input surface sized to accommodate the LEDs.
58. The light fixture of claim 48 , wherein the light guide module comprises a transparent material.
59. The light fixture of claim 58 , wherein the transparent material is an organic plastic.
60. The light fixture of claim 59 , wherein the transparent organic plastic is polycarbonate or acrylic.
61. The light fixture of claim 48 , wherein the first and second light guides are configured to scatter at least some of the light propagating within the light guides out of a side surface of the light guide.
62. The light fixture of claim 61 , wherein the first and second light guides each comprise scattering centers that scatter some of the light from within the light guide through portions of the side surface of the light guide.
63. The light fixture of claim 62 , wherein the scattering centers comprise prisms.
64. The light fixture of claim 62 , wherein the scattering centers comprise translucent contact points.
65. The light fixture of claim 62 , wherein the scattering centers comprise discontinuities in a surface of the light guide.
66. The light fixture of claim 48 , further comprising first and second optical extractors each positioned at an edge of the first and second light guides, respectively opposite the array of LEDs, each optical extractor being configured to receive light exiting the light guide and to direct the received light away from the light fixture.
67. The light fixture of claim 48 , wherein the LEDs are white LEDs
Priority Applications (4)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US14/977,460 US20160109645A1 (en) | 2011-08-08 | 2015-12-21 | Illumination Devices Including Multiple Light Emitting Elements |
US15/917,535 US10859758B2 (en) | 2011-08-08 | 2018-03-09 | Illumination devices including multiple light emitting elements |
US15/924,102 US20180210140A1 (en) | 2011-08-08 | 2018-03-16 | Illumination Devices Including Multiple Light Emitting Elements |
US16/152,287 US20190033510A1 (en) | 2011-08-08 | 2018-10-04 | Illumination Devices Including Multiple Light Emitting Elements |
Applications Claiming Priority (9)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US13/205,548 US8573823B2 (en) | 2011-08-08 | 2011-08-08 | Solid-state luminaire |
US201261594849P | 2012-02-03 | 2012-02-03 | |
US201261594954P | 2012-02-03 | 2012-02-03 | |
US201261603205P | 2012-02-24 | 2012-02-24 | |
US201261640719P | 2012-04-30 | 2012-04-30 | |
US13/570,243 US9028120B2 (en) | 2011-08-08 | 2012-08-08 | Illumination devices including multiple light emitting elements |
US13/757,708 US9081125B2 (en) | 2011-08-08 | 2013-02-01 | Illumination devices including multiple light emitting elements |
US14/797,046 US10823905B2 (en) | 2011-08-08 | 2015-07-10 | Illumination devices including multiple light emitting elements |
US14/977,460 US20160109645A1 (en) | 2011-08-08 | 2015-12-21 | Illumination Devices Including Multiple Light Emitting Elements |
Related Parent Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US14/797,046 Continuation US10823905B2 (en) | 2011-08-08 | 2015-07-10 | Illumination devices including multiple light emitting elements |
Related Child Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US15/917,535 Continuation US10859758B2 (en) | 2011-08-08 | 2018-03-09 | Illumination devices including multiple light emitting elements |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20160109645A1 true US20160109645A1 (en) | 2016-04-21 |
Family
ID=48945423
Family Applications (7)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US13/757,708 Active 2031-12-17 US9081125B2 (en) | 2011-08-08 | 2013-02-01 | Illumination devices including multiple light emitting elements |
US14/797,046 Active US10823905B2 (en) | 2011-08-08 | 2015-07-10 | Illumination devices including multiple light emitting elements |
US14/977,460 Abandoned US20160109645A1 (en) | 2011-08-08 | 2015-12-21 | Illumination Devices Including Multiple Light Emitting Elements |
US15/917,535 Active US10859758B2 (en) | 2011-08-08 | 2018-03-09 | Illumination devices including multiple light emitting elements |
US15/924,102 Abandoned US20180210140A1 (en) | 2011-08-08 | 2018-03-16 | Illumination Devices Including Multiple Light Emitting Elements |
US16/152,287 Abandoned US20190033510A1 (en) | 2011-08-08 | 2018-10-04 | Illumination Devices Including Multiple Light Emitting Elements |
US17/087,466 Active US11703631B2 (en) | 2011-08-08 | 2020-11-02 | Illumination devices including multiple light emitting elements |
Family Applications Before (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US13/757,708 Active 2031-12-17 US9081125B2 (en) | 2011-08-08 | 2013-02-01 | Illumination devices including multiple light emitting elements |
US14/797,046 Active US10823905B2 (en) | 2011-08-08 | 2015-07-10 | Illumination devices including multiple light emitting elements |
Family Applications After (4)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US15/917,535 Active US10859758B2 (en) | 2011-08-08 | 2018-03-09 | Illumination devices including multiple light emitting elements |
US15/924,102 Abandoned US20180210140A1 (en) | 2011-08-08 | 2018-03-16 | Illumination Devices Including Multiple Light Emitting Elements |
US16/152,287 Abandoned US20190033510A1 (en) | 2011-08-08 | 2018-10-04 | Illumination Devices Including Multiple Light Emitting Elements |
US17/087,466 Active US11703631B2 (en) | 2011-08-08 | 2020-11-02 | Illumination devices including multiple light emitting elements |
Country Status (1)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (7) | US9081125B2 (en) |
Cited By (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN109031504A (en) * | 2017-06-09 | 2018-12-18 | 株式会社小糸制作所 | Light guide with heat-resisting incident section |
US10429035B2 (en) * | 2017-01-25 | 2019-10-01 | Ledil Oy | Optical device for modifying light distribution |
US20190302344A1 (en) * | 2016-06-16 | 2019-10-03 | Philips Lighting Holding B.V. | A lighting system using a light guiding structure |
US10576877B2 (en) | 2017-03-24 | 2020-03-03 | Honda Patents & Technologies North America, Llc | Illuminated grille |
Families Citing this family (90)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
AU2010232567A1 (en) | 2009-04-01 | 2011-11-03 | Tearscience, Inc. | Ocular surface interferometry (OSI) devices, systems, and methods for imaging, processing, and/or displaying an ocular tear film and/or measuring ocular tear film layer thickness (es) |
US9888839B2 (en) | 2009-04-01 | 2018-02-13 | Tearscience, Inc. | Methods and apparatuses for determining contact lens intolerance in contact lens wearer patients based on dry eye tear film characteristic analysis and dry eye symptoms |
US9642520B2 (en) | 2009-04-01 | 2017-05-09 | Tearscience, Inc. | Background reduction apparatuses and methods of ocular surface interferometry (OSI) employing polarization for imaging, processing, and/or displaying an ocular tear film |
JP4757340B2 (en) * | 2009-10-30 | 2011-08-24 | シャープ株式会社 | Illumination apparatus, image reading apparatus including the illumination apparatus, and image forming apparatus including the image reading apparatus |
US9081125B2 (en) | 2011-08-08 | 2015-07-14 | Quarkstar Llc | Illumination devices including multiple light emitting elements |
JP5831404B2 (en) * | 2012-08-30 | 2015-12-09 | ヤマハ株式会社 | Relay device and speaker device |
CN110094666A (en) | 2012-09-13 | 2019-08-06 | 夸克星有限责任公司 | The lighting system directly or indirectly illuminated is provided |
US9746173B2 (en) | 2012-09-13 | 2017-08-29 | Quarkstar Llc | Illumination devices including enclosure panels with luminaire modules |
EP2725295B1 (en) * | 2012-10-26 | 2017-11-08 | LG Electronics Inc. | Lighting apparatus |
US9339177B2 (en) | 2012-12-21 | 2016-05-17 | Tearscience, Inc. | Full-eye illumination ocular surface imaging of an ocular tear film for determining tear film thickness and/or providing ocular topography |
KR101568669B1 (en) * | 2012-12-24 | 2015-11-12 | 주식회사 케이엠더블유 | LED lighting device |
US10234616B2 (en) * | 2013-01-30 | 2019-03-19 | Cree, Inc. | Simplified low profile module with light guide for pendant, surface mount, wall mount and stand alone luminaires |
US9625638B2 (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2017-04-18 | Cree, Inc. | Optical waveguide body |
US9869432B2 (en) | 2013-01-30 | 2018-01-16 | Cree, Inc. | Luminaires using waveguide bodies and optical elements |
US9291320B2 (en) | 2013-01-30 | 2016-03-22 | Cree, Inc. | Consolidated troffer |
US9366396B2 (en) | 2013-01-30 | 2016-06-14 | Cree, Inc. | Optical waveguide and lamp including same |
US9581751B2 (en) | 2013-01-30 | 2017-02-28 | Cree, Inc. | Optical waveguide and lamp including same |
US9690029B2 (en) | 2013-01-30 | 2017-06-27 | Cree, Inc. | Optical waveguides and luminaires incorporating same |
US9442243B2 (en) | 2013-01-30 | 2016-09-13 | Cree, Inc. | Waveguide bodies including redirection features and methods of producing same |
WO2014124229A1 (en) | 2013-02-08 | 2014-08-14 | Quarkstar Llc | Illumination system based on active and passive illumination devices |
WO2014124285A2 (en) | 2013-02-08 | 2014-08-14 | Quarkstar Llc | Illumination device providing direct and indirect illumination |
WO2014126886A1 (en) * | 2013-02-13 | 2014-08-21 | Quarkstar Llc | Solid-state luminaries |
US20140268864A1 (en) * | 2013-03-14 | 2014-09-18 | Radast Design LLC | Modular waveguide light fixture |
US10209429B2 (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2019-02-19 | Cree, Inc. | Luminaire with selectable luminous intensity pattern |
US11940643B2 (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2024-03-26 | Cree Lighting Usa Llc | Lighting fixture with waveguide |
US10436970B2 (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2019-10-08 | Ideal Industries Lighting Llc | Shaped optical waveguide bodies |
US11536894B2 (en) * | 2017-02-06 | 2022-12-27 | Ideal Industries Lighting Llc | Modular waveguides and fixtures utilizing same |
US9798072B2 (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2017-10-24 | Cree, Inc. | Optical element and method of forming an optical element |
US20150177439A1 (en) * | 2013-03-15 | 2015-06-25 | Cree, Inc. | Optical Waveguide Bodies and Luminaires Utilizing Same |
US10400984B2 (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2019-09-03 | Cree, Inc. | LED light fixture and unitary optic member therefor |
US11137120B2 (en) | 2017-02-06 | 2021-10-05 | Ideal Industries Lighting Llc | Modular lighting system |
US9645303B2 (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2017-05-09 | Cree, Inc. | Luminaires utilizing edge coupling |
US9366799B2 (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2016-06-14 | Cree, Inc. | Optical waveguide bodies and luminaires utilizing same |
US10379278B2 (en) * | 2013-03-15 | 2019-08-13 | Ideal Industries Lighting Llc | Outdoor and/or enclosed structure LED luminaire outdoor and/or enclosed structure LED luminaire having outward illumination |
US10502899B2 (en) * | 2013-03-15 | 2019-12-10 | Ideal Industries Lighting Llc | Outdoor and/or enclosed structure LED luminaire |
US9920901B2 (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2018-03-20 | Cree, Inc. | LED lensing arrangement |
JP6002071B2 (en) * | 2013-03-26 | 2016-10-05 | 株式会社東芝 | Illumination device and light guide member |
US9410680B2 (en) | 2013-04-19 | 2016-08-09 | Quarkstar Llc | Illumination devices with adjustable optical elements |
CN105792729B (en) | 2013-05-03 | 2018-04-27 | 眼泪科学公司 | For being imaged to Meibomian gland for the eyelid lighting system and method for Meibomian gland analysis |
EP3022483B1 (en) * | 2013-07-18 | 2017-07-12 | Quarkstar LLC | Luminaire module with multiple light guide elements |
JP6486926B2 (en) * | 2013-08-06 | 2019-03-20 | フィリップス ライティング ホールディング ビー ヴィ | Light emitting device |
WO2015028328A2 (en) * | 2013-08-30 | 2015-03-05 | Koninklijke Philips N.V. | Dual function luminaire |
CN109975914A (en) * | 2013-09-12 | 2019-07-05 | 夸克星有限责任公司 | Light emitting device with total internal reflection (TIR) extractor |
WO2015042174A1 (en) | 2013-09-17 | 2015-03-26 | Quarkstar Llc | Light guide illumination device with light divergence modifier |
US9279550B2 (en) * | 2013-10-09 | 2016-03-08 | GE Lighting Solutions, LLC | Luminaires having batwing photometric distribution |
US20150131285A1 (en) * | 2013-11-08 | 2015-05-14 | Heathco, Llc | Integrated Multiple Light Head |
US9795290B2 (en) | 2013-11-15 | 2017-10-24 | Tearscience, Inc. | Ocular tear film peak detection and stabilization detection systems and methods for determining tear film layer characteristics |
US9593826B2 (en) | 2013-12-12 | 2017-03-14 | Utc Fire & Security Americas Corporation, Inc. | Strobe assembly |
CN105899986B (en) * | 2014-01-08 | 2018-04-24 | 飞利浦照明控股有限公司 | Blend of colors for high-brightness LED source exports |
US9651740B2 (en) | 2014-01-09 | 2017-05-16 | Cree, Inc. | Extraction film for optical waveguide and method of producing same |
US20160333578A1 (en) * | 2014-02-04 | 2016-11-17 | Quarkstar Llc | Dividers for defining and illuminating workspaces |
US9684115B1 (en) * | 2014-04-11 | 2017-06-20 | Cooper Technologies Company | Light fixtures with waveguides |
US9784432B2 (en) * | 2014-05-21 | 2017-10-10 | Abl Ip Holding Llc | Optical assembly with form-analogous optics for translucent luminaire |
US9715056B1 (en) * | 2014-05-30 | 2017-07-25 | Cooper Technologies Company | Lightguide edge optic |
WO2015184381A1 (en) * | 2014-05-30 | 2015-12-03 | Cooper Technologies Company | Managed illumination lightguide |
US9574762B1 (en) | 2014-09-30 | 2017-02-21 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Light assemblies for electronic devices containing audio circuitry |
US9348080B1 (en) * | 2014-11-18 | 2016-05-24 | Quarkstar Llc | Wall wash luminaire with light guide and optical element therefore |
US10386571B1 (en) | 2015-02-26 | 2019-08-20 | Cooper Technologies Company | Apparatus for coupling light into lightguides |
US10830415B2 (en) * | 2015-05-14 | 2020-11-10 | Lumenpulse Group Inc./Group Lumenpulse Inc. | Light emitting panel assemblies with bottom-mounted light source and light guides therefor |
TWI592607B (en) * | 2015-06-05 | 2017-07-21 | 泰金寶電通股份有限公司 | Light source module and omnidirectional lamp |
US10261362B2 (en) | 2015-09-01 | 2019-04-16 | Manufacturing Resources International, Inc. | Optical sheet tensioner |
US9920904B2 (en) * | 2015-12-07 | 2018-03-20 | George A. Articolo | Critical angle lens reflector |
US10253948B1 (en) * | 2017-03-27 | 2019-04-09 | EcoSense Lighting, Inc. | Lighting systems having multiple edge-lit lightguide panels |
US11635188B2 (en) | 2017-03-27 | 2023-04-25 | Korrus, Inc. | Lighting systems generating visible-light emissions for dynamically emulating sky colors |
US11585515B2 (en) | 2016-01-28 | 2023-02-21 | Korrus, Inc. | Lighting controller for emulating progression of ambient sunlight |
USD810348S1 (en) * | 2016-02-26 | 2018-02-13 | Cooper Technologies Company | Dual lightguide light fixture |
WO2017151666A1 (en) * | 2016-02-29 | 2017-09-08 | Quarkstar Llc | Backlight for signage display |
DE102016204181A1 (en) * | 2016-03-15 | 2017-09-21 | Osram Gmbh | Retrofit lamp and vehicle headlight with retrofit lamp |
DE102016204697A1 (en) * | 2016-03-22 | 2017-09-28 | Osram Gmbh | Retrofit lamp and vehicle headlight with retrofit lamp |
MX2018012652A (en) | 2016-04-20 | 2019-01-31 | Hubbell Inc | Multi-function lighting fixture. |
US11719882B2 (en) | 2016-05-06 | 2023-08-08 | Ideal Industries Lighting Llc | Waveguide-based light sources with dynamic beam shaping |
DE202016102425U1 (en) * | 2016-05-06 | 2017-08-09 | Rehau Ag + Co | Fixing profile |
US10416377B2 (en) | 2016-05-06 | 2019-09-17 | Cree, Inc. | Luminaire with controllable light emission |
US10378747B1 (en) * | 2016-09-26 | 2019-08-13 | Ryan Hanslip | Field-configurable LED tape light |
CN108021265B (en) * | 2016-11-02 | 2021-06-11 | 群创光电股份有限公司 | Display device |
US11520097B2 (en) * | 2017-02-02 | 2022-12-06 | Fusion Optix, Inc. | Single edge lit lighting module and light fixture producing tailored light distributions |
US11598912B2 (en) * | 2017-02-02 | 2023-03-07 | Fusion Optix, Inc. | Single edge lit lighting module with bi-lobed light distribution |
CA2993859A1 (en) * | 2017-02-02 | 2018-08-02 | Terence Yeo | Single edge lit lighting module producing tailored light distributions |
US11635179B2 (en) * | 2017-02-02 | 2023-04-25 | Fusion Optix, Inc. | Linear lighting assembly with single edge-lit light scattering optical element |
CN109237413B (en) * | 2017-06-17 | 2021-06-18 | 深圳市绎立锐光科技开发有限公司 | Car lamp system |
US20200374995A1 (en) * | 2018-01-10 | 2020-11-26 | Quarkstar Llc | Luminaires for spatial dimming |
WO2019157501A1 (en) | 2018-02-12 | 2019-08-15 | Quarkstar Llc | Luminaires for spatial dimming |
WO2019173543A1 (en) | 2018-03-06 | 2019-09-12 | Quarkstar Llc | Luminaire and lighting system providing directional light output |
EP4060375A1 (en) * | 2018-07-08 | 2022-09-21 | Artilux Inc. | Light emission apparatus |
WO2020072331A1 (en) * | 2018-10-04 | 2020-04-09 | Quarkstar Llc | Luminaire with hollow optical systems |
KR102589994B1 (en) | 2018-12-12 | 2023-10-18 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Display device |
US20220187527A1 (en) * | 2019-02-22 | 2022-06-16 | Quarkstar Llc | Luminaire with luminous element |
TWI688817B (en) * | 2019-03-07 | 2020-03-21 | 旭智科技股份有限公司 | Project light source of module |
WO2021023861A1 (en) | 2019-08-08 | 2021-02-11 | Sgm Light A/S | Lighting device with motorised collimation control |
WO2021193894A1 (en) * | 2020-03-27 | 2021-09-30 | 日東電工株式会社 | Illumination device |
Citations (18)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US6802628B2 (en) * | 2002-10-18 | 2004-10-12 | Heng Huang Kuo | Vertically downward type back-light module |
US20050111235A1 (en) * | 2003-11-21 | 2005-05-26 | Nobuyuki Suzuki | Vehicle lamp and method of use |
US6991358B2 (en) * | 2002-12-04 | 2006-01-31 | Advanced Display Inc. | Planar light source unit and display device |
US7246931B2 (en) * | 2004-12-15 | 2007-07-24 | Epistar Corporation | LED light source |
US20070171678A1 (en) * | 2006-01-23 | 2007-07-26 | Sung-Kyu Shim | Light guiding unit and backlight assembly having the same |
US7375382B2 (en) * | 2005-06-23 | 2008-05-20 | Osram Sylvania, Inc. | Direct optical light guide |
US20090027588A1 (en) * | 2007-07-29 | 2009-01-29 | Medendorp Jr Nicholas W | Led backlight system for lcd displays |
US7837370B2 (en) * | 2008-10-10 | 2010-11-23 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Low profile side emission TIR lens for LED |
US20110001901A1 (en) * | 2007-12-05 | 2011-01-06 | Solomon Jeffrey L | Dual lightguide |
EP2357367A1 (en) * | 2010-02-16 | 2011-08-17 | Gust. Alberts GmbH & Co. KG | Assembly systems for plates and pipes |
US20120069600A1 (en) * | 2010-09-16 | 2012-03-22 | Yu-Jeng Lin | Double-Sided Light-Emitting Light Guide Plate Assembly and Method for Manufacturing the Same |
US20120147621A1 (en) * | 2009-08-19 | 2012-06-14 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Lighting device having a lens including a plurality of interconnected elongated light-guiding elements |
US8277106B2 (en) * | 2007-05-10 | 2012-10-02 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Lighting device |
US20120328242A1 (en) * | 2011-06-25 | 2012-12-27 | Andreas Hesse | Optical system for coupling light from point light sources into a flat light guide |
US20130279198A1 (en) * | 2012-04-20 | 2013-10-24 | Lextar Electronics Corp. | Light module and light guide device thereof |
US8696184B2 (en) * | 2011-11-09 | 2014-04-15 | Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba | Surface light source device |
US9519095B2 (en) * | 2013-01-30 | 2016-12-13 | Cree, Inc. | Optical waveguides |
US9625636B2 (en) * | 2013-03-15 | 2017-04-18 | Cree, Inc. | Optical waveguide bodies and luminaires utilizing same |
Family Cites Families (226)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US2194841A (en) | 1938-12-21 | 1940-03-26 | Grand Rapids Store Equip Co | Reflector |
US2626120A (en) | 1950-10-23 | 1953-01-20 | Frederick C Baker | Suspension means for vertical shafts |
US3319059A (en) * | 1964-12-30 | 1967-05-09 | Miller Co | Sectional lighting fixture |
DE10006410A1 (en) | 2000-02-14 | 2001-08-16 | Zumtobel Staff Gmbh | Recessed ceiling light fitting has concave reflector and light diffuser cooperating to provide divergent light chambers on either side of tubular gas discharge lamp |
DE2133719C3 (en) | 1971-07-07 | 1978-08-24 | Original Hanau Quarzlampen Gmbh, 6450 Hanau | Operating light |
US3836767A (en) | 1973-02-26 | 1974-09-17 | Moldcast Mfg Co | Lighting fixtures |
US4240692A (en) | 1975-12-17 | 1980-12-23 | The University Of Chicago | Energy transmission |
US4112483A (en) | 1976-07-28 | 1978-09-05 | Optical Coating Laboratory, Inc. | Lighting fixture and method using multiple reflections |
DE7918876U1 (en) | 1979-06-30 | 1980-01-17 | Lohmann-Werke Gmbh & Co, 4800 Bielefeld | DEVICE FOR HEIGHT-ADJUSTABLE SUSPENSION OF A WITH LUMINAIRES, SPOTLIGHTS OR THE LIKE. EQUIPPED FRAME |
US4271408A (en) | 1978-10-17 | 1981-06-02 | Stanley Electric Co., Ltd. | Colored-light emitting display |
US4254456A (en) | 1980-02-27 | 1981-03-03 | General Electric Company | Luminaire for assembly line |
US4712165A (en) * | 1986-09-05 | 1987-12-08 | Cetrone Vincent B | Tubular overhead lighting system |
US5075827A (en) | 1990-10-31 | 1991-12-24 | Smith David H | Indirect light fixture amplification reflector system |
US5134550A (en) | 1991-06-28 | 1992-07-28 | Young Richard A | Indirect lighting fixture |
US5289356A (en) | 1991-07-19 | 1994-02-22 | Nioptics Corporation | Nonimaging optical illumination system |
US5436805A (en) | 1992-10-29 | 1995-07-25 | Hughes Aircraft Company | Thermally insulated distributed light network from a central light source |
US5438485A (en) | 1993-01-07 | 1995-08-01 | Ford Motor Company | Illuminator for use with a remote light source |
CA2134902C (en) | 1994-04-07 | 2000-05-16 | Friedrich Bertignoll | Light diffusing apparatus |
US5448460A (en) | 1994-05-05 | 1995-09-05 | Lighting World Inc. | Fluorescent lighting fixture having a bendable support and mounting system |
CN2200747Y (en) | 1994-05-24 | 1995-06-14 | 吴国松 | Wall lamp with special projection effect |
US5810463A (en) | 1994-11-28 | 1998-09-22 | Nikon Corporation | Illumination device |
JP3437309B2 (en) | 1995-02-23 | 2003-08-18 | キヤノン株式会社 | Lighting equipment for photography |
JPH08321918A (en) | 1995-03-22 | 1996-12-03 | Canon Inc | Light transmission body, lighting fixture having the light transmission body and information processor having the lighting fixture |
US5777857A (en) * | 1995-10-16 | 1998-07-07 | Cooper Industries, Inc. | Energy efficient lighting system |
US5988836A (en) | 1996-07-31 | 1999-11-23 | Swarens; Ralph W. | Recessed indirect fluorescent light fixture with flexible reflector |
US5868489A (en) | 1997-02-28 | 1999-02-09 | Fuller; Robert J. | Transparent electrical fixture |
US6441943B1 (en) | 1997-04-02 | 2002-08-27 | Gentex Corporation | Indicators and illuminators using a semiconductor radiation emitter package |
US6273577B1 (en) | 1997-10-31 | 2001-08-14 | Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd. | Light guide plate, surface light source using the light guide plate, and liquid crystal display using the surface light source |
DE19840475A1 (en) | 1998-09-04 | 2000-03-30 | Armin Hopp | Lighting equipment |
FR2784739B1 (en) | 1998-10-19 | 2004-12-17 | 3Sa | LIGHTING DEVICE FOR PLACEMENT AT HEIGHT |
US6241369B1 (en) | 1998-11-20 | 2001-06-05 | Cooper Technologies Company | Quick mount fixture |
US6186642B1 (en) | 1999-03-12 | 2001-02-13 | Steelcase Inc. | On-site fabricated linear ambient lighting system |
US6250019B1 (en) | 1999-04-09 | 2001-06-26 | Steelcase Development Corporation | Furniture arrangement configured to support overhead utilities and lighting |
DE19917401A1 (en) | 1999-04-16 | 2000-10-26 | Hauke Haller | Lighting body has board between two plates, of which at least one has openings corresponding. to LEDs on board; board with LEDs and plates are joined together to form panel |
JP4015421B2 (en) | 1999-07-21 | 2007-11-28 | テレダイン ライティング アンド ディスプレイ プロダクツ, インコーポレイテッド | Lighting device |
US6234643B1 (en) | 1999-09-01 | 2001-05-22 | Joseph F. Lichon, Jr. | Lay-in/recessed lighting fixture having direct/indirect reflectors |
US6350041B1 (en) | 1999-12-03 | 2002-02-26 | Cree Lighting Company | High output radial dispersing lamp using a solid state light source |
US6505953B1 (en) | 2000-04-06 | 2003-01-14 | Genlyte Thomas Group Llc | Luminaire optical system |
US6543911B1 (en) | 2000-05-08 | 2003-04-08 | Farlight Llc | Highly efficient luminaire having optical transformer providing precalculated angular intensity distribution and method therefore |
JP2002075025A (en) | 2000-08-25 | 2002-03-15 | Stanley Electric Co Ltd | Led lighting fixture for vehicle |
US6350039B1 (en) * | 2000-10-06 | 2002-02-26 | Lee Chien-Yu | Wall switch and lamp assembly |
US7083315B2 (en) | 2001-03-26 | 2006-08-01 | Siemens Airfield Solutions | Elevated airfield runway and taxiway edge-lights utilizing light emitting diodes |
US6540373B2 (en) | 2001-03-29 | 2003-04-01 | Bendrix L. Bailey | Lighting system |
US6598998B2 (en) | 2001-05-04 | 2003-07-29 | Lumileds Lighting, U.S., Llc | Side emitting light emitting device |
US6784603B2 (en) | 2001-07-20 | 2004-08-31 | Teledyne Lighting And Display Products, Inc. | Fluorescent lighting apparatus |
CN1464953A (en) | 2001-08-09 | 2003-12-31 | 松下电器产业株式会社 | Led illuminator and card type led illuminating light source |
US7949668B2 (en) | 2001-08-20 | 2011-05-24 | Pardalis, Inc. | Common point authoring system for the complex sharing of hierarchically authored data objects in a distribution chain |
DE20114561U1 (en) | 2001-09-04 | 2003-01-23 | Ceag Sicherheitstechnik Gmbh | edge luminaire |
US6948828B1 (en) | 2001-10-18 | 2005-09-27 | Ilight Technologies, Inc. | Illumination device for simulating neon of a predetermined design and method for making same |
US6834979B1 (en) | 2001-10-18 | 2004-12-28 | Ilight Technologies, Inc. | Illumination device for simulating neon lighting with reflector |
US6948840B2 (en) | 2001-11-16 | 2005-09-27 | Everbrite, Llc | Light emitting diode light bar |
US6527420B1 (en) | 2001-12-06 | 2003-03-04 | Prokia Technology Co., Ltd. | Illuminating module for a display apparatus |
US6851834B2 (en) | 2001-12-21 | 2005-02-08 | Joseph A. Leysath | Light emitting diode lamp having parabolic reflector and diffuser |
US6769785B1 (en) | 2002-03-14 | 2004-08-03 | Acuity Brands, Inc. | Edge connectable lighting fixture assembly |
AUPS119302A0 (en) | 2002-03-20 | 2002-04-18 | Haines, Christopher Alan | A lighting fixture including two reflectors |
US8100552B2 (en) | 2002-07-12 | 2012-01-24 | Yechezkal Evan Spero | Multiple light-source illuminating system |
JP2004047351A (en) | 2002-07-15 | 2004-02-12 | Koito Mfg Co Ltd | Vehicular lighting fixture |
JP4094366B2 (en) | 2002-07-24 | 2008-06-04 | 株式会社小糸製作所 | Vehicle lighting |
US6866396B2 (en) * | 2002-10-09 | 2005-03-15 | Jji Lighting Group, Inc. | Illuminating device with rotatably adjustable support |
US6786619B2 (en) | 2002-10-25 | 2004-09-07 | Acuity Brands, Inc. | Reflector/refractor light control luminaire |
EP1418459A1 (en) | 2002-11-08 | 2004-05-12 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Optical device comprising cubo-octahedral polyhedron as light flux splitter or light diffusing element |
US7063449B2 (en) | 2002-11-21 | 2006-06-20 | Element Labs, Inc. | Light emitting diode (LED) picture element |
US7182480B2 (en) | 2003-03-05 | 2007-02-27 | Tir Systems Ltd. | System and method for manipulating illumination created by an array of light emitting devices |
TW595723U (en) | 2003-03-06 | 2004-06-21 | Taiwan Nano Electro Opt Tech | Adjusting device for brightness and darkness area of point source |
JP4049260B2 (en) | 2003-03-11 | 2008-02-20 | 株式会社小糸製作所 | Vehicle lighting |
CN100507352C (en) | 2003-03-17 | 2009-07-01 | 皇家飞利浦电子股份有限公司 | Luminaire |
US8075147B2 (en) | 2003-05-13 | 2011-12-13 | Light Prescriptions Innovators, Llc | Optical device for LED-based lamp |
US7021797B2 (en) | 2003-05-13 | 2006-04-04 | Light Prescriptions Innovators, Llc | Optical device for repositioning and redistributing an LED's light |
US20040257803A1 (en) | 2003-06-23 | 2004-12-23 | Brilliant Ideas And Design, Llc | Ceiling light illuminated display |
US7163305B2 (en) | 2003-06-25 | 2007-01-16 | Gemtron Corporation | Illuminated shelf |
US20070201234A1 (en) | 2003-07-21 | 2007-08-30 | Clemens Ottermann | Luminous element |
DE10336162B4 (en) | 2003-08-07 | 2009-05-28 | Odelo Gmbh | Lighting unit with light source and light guide |
US7777430B2 (en) | 2003-09-12 | 2010-08-17 | Terralux, Inc. | Light emitting diode replacement lamp |
JP4442216B2 (en) | 2003-12-19 | 2010-03-31 | 豊田合成株式会社 | LED lamp device |
JP4300123B2 (en) | 2004-01-13 | 2009-07-22 | スタンレー電気株式会社 | LED lamp using light guide |
EP1711739A4 (en) | 2004-01-28 | 2008-07-23 | Tir Technology Lp | Directly viewable luminaire |
IES20050086A2 (en) | 2004-02-17 | 2005-09-21 | William M Kelly | A utility lamp |
US20050185416A1 (en) | 2004-02-24 | 2005-08-25 | Eastman Kodak Company | Brightness enhancement film using light concentrator array |
US7258467B2 (en) | 2004-03-12 | 2007-08-21 | Honeywell International, Inc. | Low profile direct/indirect luminaires |
EP1723366A1 (en) | 2004-03-12 | 2006-11-22 | Honeywell International Inc. | Luminaires for artificial lighting |
US6971781B2 (en) | 2004-03-18 | 2005-12-06 | The Boeing Company | Remote source lighting |
US7207698B2 (en) | 2004-03-30 | 2007-04-24 | Irwin Kotovsky | Method and apparatus for lighting involving reflectors |
CN101076744B (en) | 2004-04-23 | 2010-05-12 | 光处方革新有限公司 | Optical manifold for light-emitting diodes |
US7724440B2 (en) | 2004-04-23 | 2010-05-25 | Light Prescriptions Innovators, Llc | Combining outputs of different light sources |
DE102004020122B4 (en) | 2004-04-24 | 2007-06-06 | Diehl Aerospace Gmbh | LED tubes hybrid lighting device |
JP2005353574A (en) * | 2004-05-13 | 2005-12-22 | Toshiba Lighting & Technology Corp | Multiple circular fluorescent lamp and lighting system |
KR100586966B1 (en) | 2004-05-27 | 2006-06-08 | 삼성전기주식회사 | Back light module |
TWI282017B (en) | 2004-05-28 | 2007-06-01 | Epistar Corp | Planar light device |
US20050270774A1 (en) | 2004-06-03 | 2005-12-08 | Frank Pan | LED illuminating strip unit |
JP4020397B2 (en) | 2004-06-14 | 2007-12-12 | 惠次 飯村 | Surface light source using point light source |
US7255469B2 (en) | 2004-06-30 | 2007-08-14 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Phosphor based illumination system having a light guide and an interference reflector |
US7204631B2 (en) | 2004-06-30 | 2007-04-17 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Phosphor based illumination system having a plurality of light guides and an interference reflector |
US7182498B2 (en) | 2004-06-30 | 2007-02-27 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Phosphor based illumination system having a plurality of light guides and an interference reflector |
US20060098444A1 (en) | 2004-08-17 | 2006-05-11 | Anthony Petruzzi | Lighting system |
US7168839B2 (en) | 2004-09-20 | 2007-01-30 | Visteon Global Technologies, Inc. | LED bulb |
WO2006033029A1 (en) | 2004-09-24 | 2006-03-30 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Illumination system |
TWI249257B (en) | 2004-09-24 | 2006-02-11 | Epistar Corp | Illumination apparatus |
US8541795B2 (en) | 2004-10-12 | 2013-09-24 | Cree, Inc. | Side-emitting optical coupling device |
US7331691B2 (en) | 2004-10-29 | 2008-02-19 | Goldeneye, Inc. | Light emitting diode light source with heat transfer means |
WO2006054199A1 (en) | 2004-11-17 | 2006-05-26 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N. V. | Light source and illumination device comprising at least one light-emitting element |
US8646927B2 (en) | 2004-12-15 | 2014-02-11 | Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute | Scattered-photon extraction-based light fixtures |
JP2008524793A (en) | 2004-12-16 | 2008-07-10 | コーニンクレッカ フィリップス エレクトロニクス エヌ ヴィ | Feedback controlled illumination system having an array of LEDs and a detector between said LEDs |
DE102005003367B4 (en) | 2005-01-24 | 2009-05-07 | Odelo Gmbh | Light unit with light divider |
US7238365B1 (en) | 2005-02-08 | 2007-07-03 | Wellmark International | Pesticide formulation |
KR100644684B1 (en) | 2005-02-26 | 2006-11-14 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Linear side emitter and back light system and liquid display apparatus employing it |
US7616849B1 (en) | 2005-03-23 | 2009-11-10 | Simon Jerome H | Illuminating devices including uniform light distribution, multiple light sources, and multiple types of light sources |
KR101227609B1 (en) | 2005-04-21 | 2013-01-30 | 니치아 카가쿠 고교 가부시키가이샤 | Electrically illuminating indicator needle and light guiding member |
DE102005042523A1 (en) | 2005-05-31 | 2006-12-07 | Osram Opto Semiconductors Gmbh | lighting device |
WO2007002476A2 (en) | 2005-06-28 | 2007-01-04 | Lamina Ceramics, Inc. | Backlight module display with optical coupler and lightguide |
DE102005032650A1 (en) | 2005-07-13 | 2007-02-01 | Hella Kgaa Hueck & Co. | Lamp for vehicles |
US20070047228A1 (en) | 2005-08-27 | 2007-03-01 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Methods of forming direct-lit backlights having light recycling cavity with concave transflector |
US8231251B2 (en) | 2005-10-28 | 2012-07-31 | Philips Lumileds Lighting Company Llc | Multiple piece reflective angle transformer |
US20070280593A1 (en) | 2005-11-04 | 2007-12-06 | Optical Research Associates | High contrast edge-lit signs and images |
WO2007074933A1 (en) | 2005-12-27 | 2007-07-05 | Showa Denko K.K. | Light guide member, flat light source device, and display device |
TWI294023B (en) | 2006-03-17 | 2008-03-01 | Ind Tech Res Inst | Reflective illumination device |
JP5642385B2 (en) | 2006-06-13 | 2014-12-17 | ウェイヴィーン・インコーポレイテッド | Lighting system and method for recycling light to increase the brightness of a light source |
EP2041485A1 (en) | 2006-07-10 | 2009-04-01 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Waveguide with asymmetric outcoupling |
MX2009001039A (en) | 2006-07-28 | 2009-03-25 | Tir Technology Lp | Light source comprising edge emitting elements. |
WO2008017968A2 (en) | 2006-08-09 | 2008-02-14 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | An illumination device comprising a light source and a light-guide |
DE102006043402B4 (en) | 2006-09-15 | 2019-05-09 | Osram Gmbh | Lighting unit with an optical element |
US7789531B2 (en) | 2006-10-02 | 2010-09-07 | Illumitex, Inc. | LED system and method |
WO2008047278A2 (en) | 2006-10-16 | 2008-04-24 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Luminaire with leds |
TW200823558A (en) | 2006-11-23 | 2008-06-01 | Lite On Technology Corp | Light source unit and backlight module with the light source unit |
US7771085B2 (en) | 2007-01-16 | 2010-08-10 | Steven Kim | Circular LED panel light |
US7386214B1 (en) | 2007-02-01 | 2008-06-10 | The Boeing Company | Homogenizing optical beam combiner |
US8876348B2 (en) | 2007-02-12 | 2014-11-04 | Fusion Optix, Inc | Light fixture comprising a multi-functional non-imaging opitical component |
US20080192458A1 (en) | 2007-02-12 | 2008-08-14 | Intematix Corporation | Light emitting diode lighting system |
KR20080088324A (en) | 2007-03-29 | 2008-10-02 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Keypad assembly |
US20090034230A1 (en) * | 2007-07-31 | 2009-02-05 | Luminus Devices, Inc. | Illumination assembly including wavelength converting material having spatially varying density |
US7967477B2 (en) | 2007-09-06 | 2011-06-28 | Philips Lumileds Lighting Company Llc | Compact optical system and lenses for producing uniform collimated light |
JP5100278B2 (en) | 2007-09-25 | 2012-12-19 | キヤノン株式会社 | Light guiding optical system, document illumination device using the same, and image reading device using the same |
US8434909B2 (en) | 2007-10-09 | 2013-05-07 | Flex Lighting Ii, Llc | Light emitting display with light mixing within a film |
US7984999B2 (en) | 2007-10-17 | 2011-07-26 | Xicato, Inc. | Illumination device with light emitting diodes and moveable light adjustment member |
US8147081B2 (en) | 2007-12-26 | 2012-04-03 | Lumination Llc | Directional linear light source |
US8721149B2 (en) | 2008-01-30 | 2014-05-13 | Qualcomm Mems Technologies, Inc. | Illumination device having a tapered light guide |
JP2011512006A (en) | 2008-01-30 | 2011-04-14 | デジタル オプティクス インターナショナル,リミティド ライアビリティ カンパニー | Thin lighting system |
WO2009105168A2 (en) | 2008-02-15 | 2009-08-27 | Adaptive Lighting Solutions Llc | An led based lighting system providing independently controllable light distribution patterns |
TW200938913A (en) | 2008-03-13 | 2009-09-16 | Kismart Corp | A flat panel display capable of multi-sided viewings and its back light module |
CN201203056Y (en) | 2008-04-21 | 2009-03-04 | 冯昭扬 | Half-direct lighting fluorescent light fitting |
US8002446B1 (en) | 2008-06-09 | 2011-08-23 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Virtual direct and indirect suspended lighting fixture |
CN101608768A (en) | 2008-06-18 | 2009-12-23 | 富准精密工业(深圳)有限公司 | LED lamp |
JP3144725U (en) | 2008-06-27 | 2008-09-11 | 株式会社オプトワールド | Light emitting module support device |
FR2934353B1 (en) | 2008-07-25 | 2011-03-11 | Valeo Vision Sas | OPTICAL SYSTEM WITH LARGE EMISSION SURFACE LIGHTING FUNCTION FOR MOTOR VEHICLE |
US8006453B2 (en) | 2008-08-13 | 2011-08-30 | Anderson Rick David | Hanging display system |
US8434902B2 (en) | 2008-09-02 | 2013-05-07 | American Dj Supply, Inc. | Modular lighting fixture system |
EP2161494B2 (en) | 2008-09-05 | 2020-04-29 | HELLA GmbH & Co. KGaA | Lighting device for a motor vehicle |
JP5438766B2 (en) | 2008-09-12 | 2014-03-12 | コーニンクレッカ フィリップス エヌ ヴェ | Lighting fixture and lighting system |
DE102008047010A1 (en) | 2008-09-12 | 2010-03-18 | Zumtobel Lighting Gmbh | System for brightening the ceiling of a room |
GB2463913B (en) | 2008-09-29 | 2012-07-04 | Iti Scotland Ltd | Light guide device |
WO2010042423A2 (en) | 2008-10-06 | 2010-04-15 | Light Prescriptions Innovators, Llc | Compact led downlight with cuspated flux-redistribution lens |
EP2350526B1 (en) | 2008-10-10 | 2014-12-31 | Qualcomm Mems Technologies, Inc | Distributed illumination system |
US8506103B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2013-08-13 | Keiji Iimura | Semiconductor lamp and light bulb type LED lamp |
JP5457461B2 (en) | 2008-12-05 | 2014-04-02 | コーニンクレッカ フィリップス エヌ ヴェ | Method and system for controlling lighting characteristics of a plurality of lighting segments |
DE102008060874A1 (en) | 2008-12-09 | 2010-06-10 | Manfred Grimm | lamp |
US8152352B2 (en) | 2009-01-02 | 2012-04-10 | Rambus International Ltd. | Optic system for light guide with controlled output |
US8602621B2 (en) | 2009-01-09 | 2013-12-10 | Koninklijke Philips N.V. | Optical element and light source comprising the same |
CN102272515B (en) | 2009-01-09 | 2015-01-14 | 皇家飞利浦电子股份有限公司 | Light source with LEDs, light guide and reflector |
JP5711147B2 (en) | 2009-01-09 | 2015-04-30 | コーニンクレッカ フィリップス エヌ ヴェ | Light source with LED, light guide and reflector |
US8358085B2 (en) | 2009-01-13 | 2013-01-22 | Terralux, Inc. | Method and device for remote sensing and control of LED lights |
WO2010083341A2 (en) | 2009-01-14 | 2010-07-22 | Abl Ip Holding, Llc | Luminaire having floating luminous light source |
US8556452B2 (en) * | 2009-01-15 | 2013-10-15 | Ilumisys, Inc. | LED lens |
TW201030281A (en) | 2009-02-13 | 2010-08-16 | Ama Precision Inc | Light-emitting apparatus and light-guiding member thereof |
CN102348931A (en) | 2009-03-12 | 2012-02-08 | 皇家飞利浦电子股份有限公司 | Light emitting device and luminaire |
AU2010235832B2 (en) * | 2009-03-30 | 2012-09-06 | Morinaga Milk Industry Co., Ltd. | Method for producing desalted milk, and desalted milk |
RU2011143852A (en) | 2009-03-31 | 2013-05-10 | Конинклейке Филипс Электроникс Н.В. | OPTICAL DEVICE FOR SCENE LIGHTING |
JP5823948B2 (en) | 2009-04-02 | 2015-11-25 | コーニンクレッカ フィリップス エヌ ヴェKoninklijke Philips N.V. | Light emitting device and lighting apparatus |
CA2702690C (en) | 2009-05-01 | 2013-04-23 | Abl Ip Holding, Llc | Light emitting devices and applications thereof |
US20100302799A1 (en) | 2009-05-29 | 2010-12-02 | Nokia Corporation | Moving light effect using a light-guide structure |
EP2287522B1 (en) | 2009-08-19 | 2017-10-04 | LG Innotek Co., Ltd. | Lighting device |
JP5499592B2 (en) | 2009-09-17 | 2014-05-21 | ソニー株式会社 | Light guide, light source device and reading device |
KR20120072378A (en) | 2009-09-23 | 2012-07-03 | 코닌클리즈케 필립스 일렉트로닉스 엔.브이. | Light guide, illumination system, backlighting system and display device |
KR101112020B1 (en) | 2009-09-25 | 2012-02-24 | 루미리치 주식회사 | Light emitting diode illumination lamp |
DE102009048830B4 (en) | 2009-10-09 | 2012-01-12 | Osram Gesellschaft mit beschränkter Haftung | Lichtleitstruktur |
WO2011055467A1 (en) | 2009-11-04 | 2011-05-12 | ナルックス株式会社 | Lighting device |
US8042968B2 (en) | 2009-11-10 | 2011-10-25 | Lsi Industries, Inc. | Modular light reflectors and assemblies for luminaire |
EP3032921A1 (en) | 2009-11-17 | 2016-06-15 | Terralux, Inc. | Led power-supply detection and control |
DE102009060219A1 (en) | 2009-11-25 | 2011-05-26 | Sam Schulte Gmbh + Comp. | Lamp and wall mirror with light |
CZ309346B6 (en) | 2010-11-01 | 2022-09-14 | Varroc Lighting Systems, s.r.o. | Light guiding module with adjustable illumination of the contour surface |
EP2354637B1 (en) | 2010-01-30 | 2020-03-04 | HELLA GmbH & Co. KGaA | Illumination device for vehicles |
JP2013519993A (en) | 2010-02-17 | 2013-05-30 | ネクスト ライティング コーポレイション | Illumination unit having an illumination strip having a light emitting element and a remote light emitting material |
US8425075B1 (en) * | 2010-03-17 | 2013-04-23 | Bruce P. Falat | Lighting mounting device |
EP2553316B8 (en) | 2010-03-26 | 2015-07-08 | iLumisys, Inc. | Led light tube with dual sided light distribution |
US8807799B2 (en) | 2010-06-11 | 2014-08-19 | Intematix Corporation | LED-based lamps |
US8827504B2 (en) | 2010-06-18 | 2014-09-09 | Rambus Delaware Llc | Light bulb using solid-state light sources |
US8814386B2 (en) * | 2010-06-23 | 2014-08-26 | Leon So | Lighting device system and method |
CN101922632B (en) | 2010-07-22 | 2012-12-19 | 鸿富锦精密工业(深圳)有限公司 | LED lighting device |
TWI420166B (en) | 2010-07-27 | 2013-12-21 | Young Lighting Technology Corp | Light guide unit and light source module |
US9441811B2 (en) | 2010-08-20 | 2016-09-13 | Research Triangle Institute | Lighting devices utilizing optical waveguides and remote light converters, and related methods |
US20120044675A1 (en) | 2010-08-23 | 2012-02-23 | Energy Focus, Inc. | Elongated LED Lamp |
US10883702B2 (en) * | 2010-08-31 | 2021-01-05 | Ideal Industries Lighting Llc | Troffer-style fixture |
US8702292B2 (en) | 2010-09-22 | 2014-04-22 | Terralux, Inc. | Linear illumination devices having light guides and LED-based illumination modules |
EP2439564A1 (en) | 2010-10-06 | 2012-04-11 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Light-emitting device for emitting diffuse light |
US8192051B2 (en) | 2010-11-01 | 2012-06-05 | Quarkstar Llc | Bidirectional LED light sheet |
FR2967235B1 (en) | 2010-11-05 | 2014-10-31 | Valeo Vision | LIGHTING OR SIGNALING DEVICE FOR A MOTOR VEHICLE HAVING A LIGHT GUIDE RAIL. |
US20120155116A1 (en) | 2010-12-20 | 2012-06-21 | Lunera Lighting Inc. | High efficiency edge-lit light fixture |
US9103953B2 (en) | 2011-01-03 | 2015-08-11 | Lunera Lighting Inc. | Off-axis illumination LED luminaire |
DE102011000022B4 (en) | 2011-01-04 | 2019-06-27 | HELLA GmbH & Co. KGaA | Lighting unit for vehicles with a disk body in front of a planar light guide |
CN103348183A (en) | 2011-02-04 | 2013-10-09 | 柯尼卡美能达株式会社 | Illuminating device |
US20120236586A1 (en) | 2011-03-15 | 2012-09-20 | Ching-Chung Wang | Led light guide structure |
US9274270B2 (en) | 2011-03-28 | 2016-03-01 | Koninklijke Philips N.V. | Light output device with movable lightguide system |
US8469559B2 (en) | 2011-03-28 | 2013-06-25 | Target Brands, Inc. | Edge-lit lighting product |
DE102011001769A1 (en) | 2011-04-04 | 2012-10-04 | Hella Kgaa Hueck & Co. | Lamp e.g. headlamp for vehicle, has light conductor whose coupling surfaces couple light emitted from LED with respect to light from reflector, so that optical axis of LED is oriented parallel to main beam direction of light |
WO2012145293A2 (en) | 2011-04-20 | 2012-10-26 | Rambus Inc. | Lighting assembly |
WO2012154342A2 (en) | 2011-05-06 | 2012-11-15 | Rambus Inc. | Lighting assembly |
JP5547691B2 (en) | 2011-06-21 | 2014-07-16 | パナソニック株式会社 | Lighting structure |
US9028120B2 (en) | 2011-08-08 | 2015-05-12 | Quarkstar Llc | Illumination devices including multiple light emitting elements |
US9081125B2 (en) | 2011-08-08 | 2015-07-14 | Quarkstar Llc | Illumination devices including multiple light emitting elements |
US8573823B2 (en) | 2011-08-08 | 2013-11-05 | Quarkstar Llc | Solid-state luminaire |
JP6087926B2 (en) | 2011-09-06 | 2017-03-01 | フィリップス ライティング ホールディング ビー ヴィ | Luminescent panel including a transparent cellular support panel |
TWM429802U (en) | 2011-09-30 | 2012-05-21 | Chicony Power Tech Co Ltd | Light source module and light-emitting device thereof |
US8678605B2 (en) | 2011-10-31 | 2014-03-25 | Abl Ip Holding Llc | Two-component direct-indirect lighting system |
US20130107528A1 (en) * | 2011-11-01 | 2013-05-02 | Lsi Industries, Inc. | Luminaires and lighting structures |
US20130258699A1 (en) | 2012-02-06 | 2013-10-03 | Lumenetix, Inc. | System and method for mixing light emitted from an array having different color light emitting diodes |
TWI451047B (en) | 2012-03-09 | 2014-09-01 | Coretronic Corp | Light source module |
US20130265764A1 (en) | 2012-04-10 | 2013-10-10 | Qualcomm Mems Technologies, Inc. | Lighting device |
US20130308338A1 (en) | 2012-05-18 | 2013-11-21 | Uniled Lighting Taiwan Inc. | Led cup lamp with light guide |
DE102012107437B4 (en) | 2012-08-14 | 2022-04-28 | HELLA GmbH & Co. KGaA | lighting device |
CN110094666A (en) | 2012-09-13 | 2019-08-06 | 夸克星有限责任公司 | The lighting system directly or indirectly illuminated is provided |
JP6339092B2 (en) * | 2012-12-03 | 2018-06-06 | フィリップス ライティング ホールディング ビー ヴィ | Luminous arrangement using light guide |
DE102012112151B4 (en) | 2012-12-12 | 2023-11-16 | HELLA GmbH & Co. KGaA | Motor vehicle taillight with at least one taillight function, a flashing light function and a brake light function, which includes a first and at least one second light guide |
US9222637B2 (en) | 2013-03-14 | 2015-12-29 | Valeo North America, Inc. | Lightguide with horizontal cutoff and horizontal spread |
US10379278B2 (en) * | 2013-03-15 | 2019-08-13 | Ideal Industries Lighting Llc | Outdoor and/or enclosed structure LED luminaire outdoor and/or enclosed structure LED luminaire having outward illumination |
JP6066829B2 (en) | 2013-05-23 | 2017-01-25 | 三菱電機株式会社 | LED lighting device and in-vehicle lamp |
DE102013211868B4 (en) | 2013-06-21 | 2018-12-27 | Automotive Lighting Reutlingen Gmbh | Light guide for automotive lighting device |
TW201525363A (en) | 2013-12-18 | 2015-07-01 | Tyc Brother Ind Co Ltd | Light concentration light guiding device |
JP6173609B2 (en) | 2014-01-28 | 2017-08-02 | フィリップス ライティング ホールディング ビー ヴィ | Light emitting element |
-
2013
- 2013-02-01 US US13/757,708 patent/US9081125B2/en active Active
-
2015
- 2015-07-10 US US14/797,046 patent/US10823905B2/en active Active
- 2015-12-21 US US14/977,460 patent/US20160109645A1/en not_active Abandoned
-
2018
- 2018-03-09 US US15/917,535 patent/US10859758B2/en active Active
- 2018-03-16 US US15/924,102 patent/US20180210140A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2018-10-04 US US16/152,287 patent/US20190033510A1/en not_active Abandoned
-
2020
- 2020-11-02 US US17/087,466 patent/US11703631B2/en active Active
Patent Citations (19)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US6802628B2 (en) * | 2002-10-18 | 2004-10-12 | Heng Huang Kuo | Vertically downward type back-light module |
US6991358B2 (en) * | 2002-12-04 | 2006-01-31 | Advanced Display Inc. | Planar light source unit and display device |
US20050111235A1 (en) * | 2003-11-21 | 2005-05-26 | Nobuyuki Suzuki | Vehicle lamp and method of use |
US7290906B2 (en) * | 2003-11-21 | 2007-11-06 | Stanley Electric Co., Ltd. | Vehicle lamp and method of use |
US7246931B2 (en) * | 2004-12-15 | 2007-07-24 | Epistar Corporation | LED light source |
US7375382B2 (en) * | 2005-06-23 | 2008-05-20 | Osram Sylvania, Inc. | Direct optical light guide |
US20070171678A1 (en) * | 2006-01-23 | 2007-07-26 | Sung-Kyu Shim | Light guiding unit and backlight assembly having the same |
US8277106B2 (en) * | 2007-05-10 | 2012-10-02 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Lighting device |
US20090027588A1 (en) * | 2007-07-29 | 2009-01-29 | Medendorp Jr Nicholas W | Led backlight system for lcd displays |
US20110001901A1 (en) * | 2007-12-05 | 2011-01-06 | Solomon Jeffrey L | Dual lightguide |
US7837370B2 (en) * | 2008-10-10 | 2010-11-23 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Low profile side emission TIR lens for LED |
US20120147621A1 (en) * | 2009-08-19 | 2012-06-14 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Lighting device having a lens including a plurality of interconnected elongated light-guiding elements |
EP2357367A1 (en) * | 2010-02-16 | 2011-08-17 | Gust. Alberts GmbH & Co. KG | Assembly systems for plates and pipes |
US20120069600A1 (en) * | 2010-09-16 | 2012-03-22 | Yu-Jeng Lin | Double-Sided Light-Emitting Light Guide Plate Assembly and Method for Manufacturing the Same |
US20120328242A1 (en) * | 2011-06-25 | 2012-12-27 | Andreas Hesse | Optical system for coupling light from point light sources into a flat light guide |
US8696184B2 (en) * | 2011-11-09 | 2014-04-15 | Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba | Surface light source device |
US20130279198A1 (en) * | 2012-04-20 | 2013-10-24 | Lextar Electronics Corp. | Light module and light guide device thereof |
US9519095B2 (en) * | 2013-01-30 | 2016-12-13 | Cree, Inc. | Optical waveguides |
US9625636B2 (en) * | 2013-03-15 | 2017-04-18 | Cree, Inc. | Optical waveguide bodies and luminaires utilizing same |
Cited By (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20190302344A1 (en) * | 2016-06-16 | 2019-10-03 | Philips Lighting Holding B.V. | A lighting system using a light guiding structure |
US10429035B2 (en) * | 2017-01-25 | 2019-10-01 | Ledil Oy | Optical device for modifying light distribution |
US10576877B2 (en) | 2017-03-24 | 2020-03-03 | Honda Patents & Technologies North America, Llc | Illuminated grille |
CN109031504A (en) * | 2017-06-09 | 2018-12-18 | 株式会社小糸制作所 | Light guide with heat-resisting incident section |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
US11703631B2 (en) | 2023-07-18 |
US10859758B2 (en) | 2020-12-08 |
US10823905B2 (en) | 2020-11-03 |
US20190033510A1 (en) | 2019-01-31 |
US20180210140A1 (en) | 2018-07-26 |
US20130208495A1 (en) | 2013-08-15 |
US20160062032A1 (en) | 2016-03-03 |
US9081125B2 (en) | 2015-07-14 |
US20180196189A1 (en) | 2018-07-12 |
US20210318485A1 (en) | 2021-10-14 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US11703631B2 (en) | Illumination devices including multiple light emitting elements | |
US20240151895A1 (en) | Illumination devices including multiple light emitting elements | |
EP2951495B1 (en) | Illumination devices including multiple light emitting elements | |
EP3046152B1 (en) | Illumination devices including multiple light emitting elements | |
EP2951497B1 (en) | Light engine | |
EP2864694B1 (en) | Illumination device providing direct and indirect illumination | |
US20180202646A1 (en) | Devices for Workspace Illumination | |
WO2014043393A1 (en) | Solid state illumination devices including spatially-extended light sources and reflectors |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: QUARKSTAR LLC, NEVADA Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:DAU, WILSON;GARDNER, ROBERT C.;LERMAN, GEORGE;AND OTHERS;SIGNING DATES FROM 20130304 TO 20130522;REEL/FRAME:037838/0001 |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: FINAL REJECTION MAILED |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: DOCKETED NEW CASE - READY FOR EXAMINATION |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED |
|
STCB | Information on status: application discontinuation |
Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION |